HP 2240 Owner's Manual
J282/2240 Owner â s Guide î W orkstation Systems Group HP Part No. A2876â90015 Edition E1297 Printed in U.S.A.
 Hewlett-Packard Co. 1997 First Printing: December 1997 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETTâP ACKARD W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT HP PRODUCT DURA TION OF W ARRANTY J282/J2240 one year 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or likeânew . 2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. 3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. 4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. 5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP . If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery , warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery . 6. W arranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, inter facing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP , (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. 7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE ABOVE W ARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER W ARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALL Y DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , SA TISF ACTOR Y QUALITY , AND FITNESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. 8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for t he product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product. 9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE REMEDIES IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT ARE CUSTOMERâS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICA TED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DA T A OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DA T A), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, T ORT , OR OTHERWISE. FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE W ARRANTY TERMS CONT AINED IN THIS ST A TEMENT, EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDA TOR Y ST A TUTOR Y RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
iii Contents System Overview Product Description 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Unit Front Panel Controls, LED, and LCD 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . System LCD 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Switch 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power LED 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removable Device Buttons and LEDs 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Connectors 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Connector 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP Parallel I/O Connector 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802.3 Network Connectors 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-232C Serial Input/Output Connector 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Connectors 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cord Connector 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitors 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointing Devices 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Overview 1-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Information Y ou Need to Note 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANIC ID 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . Networking Overview 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mail 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telnet 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rlogin 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface Chapter 1
iv ftp 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rcp 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFS 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our CDâROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Drive 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Features 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Media 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caring for CD-ROM Discs 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM Disc 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a CD-ROM Disc 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloading a CD-ROM Disc 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 2â1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 2â14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading the Busy Light 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 2-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our DDS T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDS Drive 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs â DDS-DC Drive 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED W arning Conditions â DDS-DC Drive 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs â DDS-2 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Cassettes 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Life 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the T ape Heads 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Restrictions 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . Operating the DDS T ape Drive 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Chapter 3
v V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archiving Data in Compressed and Noncompressed Mode 3-14 . W riting to a Data Cassette 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 3-15 . . . . . . Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Command Information 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Interchangeability Restrictions 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our 3.5âInch Floppy Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting and Removing a Diskette 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the Floppy Drive 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V erifying the Floppy Drive Configuration 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting a New Diskette 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 4-8 . . . . . . . . . Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 4â9 . Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For More Information 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Floppy Driver 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dealing with a Boot Failure 5-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Failures 5â1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD-Indicated Problems 5â12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running System V erification T ests 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Chapter 5
vi Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Regulations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCCI Class 2 ITE A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Regulations Compliance A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datacom Users Statement (United Kingdom Only) A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines â3. GSGV A-4 . Acoustics A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC 825 Class 1 Laser Label A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W arnings and Cautions A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardware Configuration Checking the SCSI IDs B-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the System Unit B-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the System Unit B-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Removable Media Devices B-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Drive B-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDS T ape Drive B-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floppy Drive B-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Hard Drive B-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Hard Disk Drive B-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Hard Drive B-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Additional Memory B-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Processor Module B-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an EISA, PCI, or Graphics Board B-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Y our Monitor T ype B-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface B-64 . Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On B-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A Appendix B
vii SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSIRestrictions C-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cables C-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors and T erminator C-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Configuration Constraints C-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-8 . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . Determining SCSI Bus Length C-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow SE SCSI Bus Length C-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Length C-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Length C-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning SCSIDevice IDs C-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow Single-Ended System SCSI Device IDs C-20 . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI IDs C-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI IDs C-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the SCSI Ports C-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System SCSI Port Connection C-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Boot Console Interface î'' î'&*'$î î& î)îîîî îîî ,)î* î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîî**"& !î î'' î'&*'$î î& î)îîîî î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î'' "& î ',) î ')#* î "'& î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîî)î!"& î') î'' îî$î îîî"î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î î*î "& î ',) î ')#* î "'& î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& î&î îî "& î î !* î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& î&î îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î/îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î!î î'&" ') î'%%î&î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î,))î& î'&" ') î'&î" ,)î "'& î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î î'-î) î& î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î,))î& îî%'). î'&î" ,)î "'& î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î î ,* 'î !î î.* î% îîî î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î , ' î'' î&î î, ' îîî)î! î$î * î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Appendix C Appendix D
viii îî îîî#îîî îîî îî!!îîî !îî îîî"îî!# îîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî îîî îî!!îîî !îî î î !îîî! îîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî !îî îîî î!î!îîî îîîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî î# !îî îîîîîîî!îîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî îîî îîîîîîî!îîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Glossary Index
ix 1â1. System Unit Front Panel Controls 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2. LCD Symbols 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â3. System Unit with Removable Device Door Open 1-9 . . . . . . . . 1â4. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 1-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5. Audio Connectors 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3. Placing the CD-ROM Disc in the Disc T ray 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4. Disc T ray Closed 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6. Removing the CD-ROM Disc From the Disc T ray 2-10 . . . . . . 2â7. Disc T ray Closed 2-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1. DDS Drive Controls and Indicators 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2. Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a DDS T ape 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3. Loading a Data Cassette 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1. Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Floppy Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . 4â2. Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1. Removing the Front Panel B-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ2. Replacing the Front Panel B-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ3. Removing Storage Drawer from System Unit B-1 1 . . . . . . . . . Bâ4. Removing F AN from EMI Plate B-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ5. Removing F AN screws B-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ6. Removing F AN/EMI plate B-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ7. Removing drive screws B-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ8 CD-ROM Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-17 . . . . . . . Bâ9 DDS-DC T ape Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-19 . . . Bâ10 DDS-2 T ape Drive and SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-20 . Bâ1 1. Switch Settings for Data Compression Operation Mode B-21 . Bâ12. Floppy Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-23 . . . . . . . . . Bâ13. Floppy Drive T erminators B-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ14. Attaching Removable Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation B-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figures
x Bâ15. Replacing Drive Screws B-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ16. Replacing the Storage Drawer Assembly B-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ17. Fast, Wide Hard Drive Jumper Settings B-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ18. Replacing Hard Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation B-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ19. Removing Storage Drawer from System Unit B-33 . . . . . . . . . Bâ20. Placing Hard Drives in Storage Drawer B-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ21. Removing the CPU Assembly B-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ22. Memory Retention Bracket and Memory DIMM Location B-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ23. CPU Assembly Orientation B-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ24. Memory DIMM Sequence B-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ25. Installing Memory Cards B-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ26. Replacing the CPU Assembly B-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ27. Removing the CPU Assembly B-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ28. CPU Shroud Location J282/2240 B-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ29. J282/2240 Processor Modules B-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ30. Replacing the CPU Assembly B-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ31. EISA/PCI/GSC Slots from Outside the EISA/PCI Assembly B-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ32. EISA/GSC Slots from Inside the J282 EISA Assembly B-52 . Bâ33. GSC/PCI/EISA Slots from inside the J2240 PCI Assembly B-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ34. Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly B-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ35. PCI/EISA I/O Assembly Bâ55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ36 Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly for Installation B-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ37. Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly Cover B-57 . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ38. Removing the PCI/EISA Slot Cover B-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ39. Installing a PCI, EISA or Graphics Board in the EISA Assembly B-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ40. Remove Block from PCI Assembly Cover B-60 . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ41. Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly Cover B-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ42. Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly Back B-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ43. Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly B-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors with T erminators Attached C-27 Câ2. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without T erminators C-28 . . . . .
xi 1â1. Audio Electrical Specifications 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2. Serial I/O Pins 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Features 2-4 . . . . . . . . 3â1. LED Display Codes â DDS-DC Drive 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2. LED Display Codes â DDS-2 Drive 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â1. Problems Powering Up the System 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2. Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 5-4 . . . . 5â3. Problems with the 802.3 Network 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4. Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5. Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6. Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7. Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1. SCSI Bus Differences C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ2. SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities C-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ3. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-9 Câ4. Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . Câ5. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ6. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus C-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ7. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Fast, W ide SCSI Bus C-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ8. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus C-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ9. Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs C-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ10. Fast, Wide SCSI Device IDs C-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1 1. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Device IDs C-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dâ1. System Paths D-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dâ2. Mnemonic Style Notation D-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T ables
xii
xiii Pr eface
xiv This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the J Class Har dwar e Installation Guide.
xv This guide is intended for HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation users. See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory statements that apply to this workstation. Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your sys- tem or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication. Audience Safety and Regulatory Statements Release Document(s)
xvi If you are using HP-UX version 10.20, refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠J Class Har dwar e Installation Guide (A2876â90010) ⢠Using Y our HP W orkstation (A2615â90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355â90050) ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355â90051) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355â90053) ⢠HP V isual User Environment Userâ s Guide (B1 171â90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355â90038) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales office. The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4081â90601 E0195 First printing A4081â90607 E0695 Second printing A4476â90013 E0596 Third printing A2876â90013 E1 196 Fourth printing A2876â90014 E0597 Fifth printing A2876â90015 E1297 Latest printing Revision History
xvii Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following sym- bolic conventions. literal values Bold words or characters in formats and command de- scriptions represent commands or key words that you must use literally . Pathnames are also in bold. user -supplied Italic words or characters in formats and command values descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user In examples, information that the user enters appears input in color . output Information that the system displays appears in this typeface . Enter A colored rectangle with rounded corners and a key label denotes a key on your keyboard. (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.) Screen Button This colored symbol with a label in it denotes an HP VUE screen button. A screen button is a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display by HP VUE. It works like a keyboard key , except that you must move the mouse cursor over it and press the left mouse button to activate it. The screen buttonâ s la- bel describes its function. This symbol indicates a notice. This symbol indicates a procedure. This symbol indicates a caution. This symbol indicates the end of a chapter or a part of this guide. Documentation Conventions
xviii If you have any questions, suggestions, or problems with our hard- ware, software, or documentation, please call 1â800â633â3600 (US & Canada) or contact the HP Response Center for your country . Questions, Suggestions, or Problems
1-1 Chapter 1 System Overview ⢠Product description ⢠System unit front panel controls, LED, and LCD ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboard and Mouse ⢠Pointing devices ⢠Operating system overview ⢠Important information you need to note ⢠Networking overview
1-2 This chapter introduces the HP 9000 J282/2240 workstations. Its pur- pose is to familiarize you with your workstation and its controls and indicators. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface.
1-3 This workstation has the following key features: ⢠Operating System HP-UX version 10.20 or later (J2240 requires HPâUX 10.20 ACE (Feb 1998) plus J2240 Hardware Extensions software) ⢠User Interface HP VUE version 3.0 graphical user interface or HP CDE ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Monitors 20-inch 1280x1024 color monitor ⢠Optional Graphics HP VISUALIZEâEG, 8âplane 2D graphics HP VISUALIZEâ48XP , 48âplane graphics HP VISUALIZEâ8/24, Accelerated 8âplane or 24âplane 3D graphics HP VISUALIZEâFX2 (J2240 only) HP VISUALIZEâFX4 (J2240 only) HP VISUALIZEâFX6 (J2240 only) ⢠Main Memory 32 MB to 2 GB (J282) 32 MB to 3.3 GB (J2240 only) 32 MB to 4 GB (J2240, running HPâUX 1 1.x only) Product Description
1-4 ⢠Internal Storage Devices Fast, W ide Differential SCSI (J282/upgrade J2240 only) hard disk drives up to two: 2 or 4 GB Drives Ultra W ideâSE SCSI hard disk drives up to two (J2240 Only): 4 or 9 GB Drives Single-Ended SCSI removable Media â up to two: CD-ROM Drive 2.0â8.0 GB, 4-mm DDS tape drive Floppy drive ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI Thicknet or RJ45, UTP T wisted Pair 10 BaseT/100 BaseT (J2240 Only) ⢠Standard I/O One Narrow Single-Ended SCSI: 8-bit (for removable devices) 5 MB/sec synchronous 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous AL T -1, 50-pin, high density SCSI-2 connector One Fast, W ide Differential SCSI: (for hard disk drives, J282/upgrade J2240 only) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high-density SCSI-3 P connector One Ultra, W ide SingleâEnded SCSI: (for hard disk drives, J2240 only) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high-density SCSI-3 P connector T wo serial interfaces RS-232C, 9-pin male
1-5 One parallel interface Centronics, BUSY handshake 25-pin female ⢠EISA/GSC/PCI Five slots total; J282: four EISA and three GSC that can be used as follows: two individual EISA, one individual GSC, and two combination EISA or GSC. J2240: one EISA (optional), three 32âbit PCI, two 64âbit PCI, and three GSC that can be used as follows: one 32âbit PCI, one EISA or 32âbit PCI, one GSC or 32âbit PCI and two GSC or 64âbit PCI. ⢠Keyboard PS/2 Keyboard ⢠Mouse PS/2 Mouse
1-6 Before powering on your system, you should become familiar with the system unit controls. Figure 1â1 shows the the system unit front panel controls. îîîîîî î îî îîîîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîî î îî Figur e 1â1. System Unit Front Panel Contr ols System Unit Front Panel Controls, LED, and LCD
1-7 System LCD The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is located on the left side of the front panel. It displays messages about the state of the system, includ- ing error codes. The following symbols appear in the LCD, represent- ing the different system activities shown: Operating system running Disk Access in progress Network Receive in progress Network T ransmit in progress Figur e 1â2. LCD Symbols System Power Switch Use the Power switch to power the system unit on and off. CAUTION: Do not turn off the power to your workstation without first performing the recommended shutdown procedure. If you do not shut down your workstation properly , you can damage the programs and data on your disk. Using the proper shutdown method for your workstation and operating system also ensures that your system produces the proper diagnostic and self test messages, and broadcasts a warn- ing message to remote terminals that it is about to shutdown.
1-8 Follow the instructions in Using Y our HP W orkstation to shut down your workstation. System Power LED The Power Light Emitting Diode (LED) is located on the left side of the front panel. It lights when the system unit power is on and flashes until the OS is booted. Once the OS is booted, the LED remains on without flashing. Removable Device Buttons and LEDs Depending on your configuration, you can have up to two (2) of the following removable device drives: ⢠CD-ROM disc drive ⢠DDS tape drive ⢠Floppy diskette drive NOTICE: Y ou cannot have two of the same type of de- vice. For example, you can have a CD-ROM device and a floppy device, but not two CD- ROMs. A description of each driveâ s controls and indicators is in the chapter describing that device, later in this book. Figure 1â3 shows the system unit with the removable device door open. A removable device is in the top bay; a blank covers the empty bottom bay .
1-9 Removable Device Bays (2) Figur e 1â3. System Unit with Removable Device Door Open
1-10 This section describes the following connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel: ⢠Audio connectors (including headphones and microphone) ⢠PS/2 keyboard and mouse connectors ⢠HP parallel Centronics I/O connector ⢠802.3 AUI LAN connector ⢠802.3 TP (T wisted Pair) LAN connector ⢠RS-232C serial I/O connectors ⢠SCSI connectors including fast, wide differential, or ultra, wideâSE (J2240 only) and narrow single-ended SCSI ⢠TOC button ⢠Power cord connector ⢠HPâHIL connector (J282 only) NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 1â4 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
1-1 1 TOC Button (not shown) Fast, Wide DifferenÄ tial, or Ultra, Wide- SE SCSI Connector* Narrow , SE SC SI Connector* Keyboard Connector AUI LAN Connector T wisted Pair Connector (labeled UTP) RSÄ232C Connectors Graphics Connector Power Connector P arallel I/O Connector *SCSI Connectors are shown with terminators attached, as they are shipped from the factory . **See Figure 1-5 for detail on Audio Connectors. Mouse Connector Audio Connectors** HP-HIL Connector (J282 only) Figur e 1â4. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
1-12 The symbols shown to the left of the connector descriptions in the following text, such as the headphone and microphone for audio connectors, are the same symbols used on the rear panel of the J282/2240 workstation. Audio Connectors Y our workstation has audio input and output capability through exter- nal input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an in- ternal speaker . The rear panel contains the Audio IN (stereo line-in), Mic (microphone-in), Audio OUT (stereo line-out), and Headphones (headphones-out) connectors. Audio OUT Connector Headphones OUT Connector Audio IN Connector Mic IN Connector Figur e 1â5. Audio Connectors The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett- Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers for best quality recording and playback through the external connectors. A summary of the workstation audio features follows.
1-13 ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 1 1.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to â96dB in â1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps Input monitoring: 16-bit linear , 8-bit u-law , or A-law coding ⢠Audio Inputs Line-in Mono microphone compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage supplied by the system) CD-ROM audio (if internal CDâROM is installed) ⢠Audio Outputs Line-out Headphone Mono speaker jacks Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215
1-14 T able 1â1 summarizes the audio electrical specifications for this workstation. T able 1â1. Audio Electrical Specifications Frequency Response 25â20,000Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line in 2.0Vpk/47kohm Microphone 22mVpk/1kohm Line Out 2.8Vpp/47kohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50ohm Speaker (internal) 5.88Vpp/48ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Output Impedance Line Out Headphone Speaker Line In Microphone Line Out Headphone Speaker Line In Microphone Line Out Headphone 619ohm 1 18ohm Signal to Noise 65dB 61dB 63dB 61dB 57dB THD (w/nominal load) â73dB â70dB â68dB â75dB â73dB T o convert from dB to number of significant bits, use the formula: n = dB 20 log 10 dB 6 . For example, for 61dB S/N then n= 61/6 significant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise. ~ ~ 10 î î î î Keyboard Connectors PS/2 Keyboar d Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface for the keyboard and mouse to the system. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for specific information concerning its use.
1-15 HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface proto- cols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Con- sult the documentation that accompanies each peripheral device for specific information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors Y our workstation has built-in ThickNet LAN AUI and TP (T wisted Pair) connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) or 10 BaseT/100 BaseT (J2240 only) network. Connections to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . Y our workstation will automatically select the correct network setting. RS-232C Serial Input/Output Connector Y ou can attach a variety of pointing devices (such as a mouse or trackball), or peripheral devices to the RS-232C Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the J282/2240 workstation. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompanies each pointing or peripheral device for specific in- formation concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable. Y ou can set functions such as bit rate, character length, parity , and stop bits. The SIO Ports are used as an interface for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 19.2 K baud rate. T able 1â2 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those specified in the EIA RS-232 standard.
1-16 T able 1â2. Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Request T o Send DCD RXD TXD DTR GND RT S CTS Description Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Data Set Ready Clear T o Send Data T erminal Ready Ring Indicator T ransmit Data Ground 6 DSR 9R I SCSI Connectors Use the SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-format tape drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the documen- tation that accompanies each SCSI device for specific information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C for information about con- necting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
1-17 Y ou can use one of the following HP monitors with your workstation: ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4033A) ⢠20âinch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331A) ⢠21âinch, 1600x1200 color monitor (A4576A) Before using your monitor , you should become familiar with its con- trols, connectors, and indicators. For information on these controls and indicators and on using your monitor , see the documentation that came with it. Monitors
1-18 Y ou can use an HP three-button mouse (PS/2), a trackball, or other options as pointing devices with your workstation by using the serial ports. For instructions on using your particular pointing device, see the manual that came with it. For general information on using three-button mice and on the vari- ous cursor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . Pointing Devices
1-19 Y our workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, 10.20 or later (HPâUX 10.20 ACE (Feb 1998) plus J2240 Hardware Extensions software for J2240). Instant Ignition systems, (systems with preloaded software), have X-windows and Hewlett-Packardâ s graphical user in- terface, HP VUE version 3.0, or HP CDE installed and configured. Please refer to the âInstant Ignition System Configuration Informa- tionâ sheet that shipped with your system for details on configuration. If your Instant Ignition system does not have the kernel preconfigured with all of the device drivers you need, refer to the manual System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers to reconfigure your kernel. If you have any questions about Instant Ignition, refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information. Operating System Overview
1-20 Before you begin using your workstation, take a moment to gather the following important information and note it in the appropriate subsec- tion for future use: ⢠LANIC ID ⢠Internet Protocol (IP) address ⢠Subnetwork mask NOTICE: For help with these, refer to Using your HP W orkstation. LANIC ID Locate the contents label that comes with the workstation shipping carton. Find the LANIC ID listed there and record it here: LANIC ID _______________________________________________ Y ou can also get your LANIC ID by using the the lanscan command in a terminal window . Important Information Y ou Need to Note
1-21 IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information Get the IP address and the subnet mask information for your worksta- tion from either your system administrator or your network adminis- trator and note them here: IP address ______________________________________________ subnet mask _____________________________________________
1-22 Y our workstation is capable of many more tasks than are described in this owner â s guide. This section gives an overview of some of the net- working capabilities of your system and directs you to the appropriate source for more information. Mail Electronic mail allows you to send and receive mail messages on your workstation. For information on setting up and using electronic mail on your workstation, contact your system administrator and also see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your worksta- tion. telnet The telnet application uses the TELNET protocol to communicate with another computer system on the network. The telnet application allows you to log on to the remote system from your workstation. For more information on telnet read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man telnet Enter rlogin The rlogin application also allows you to log on to another computer system on the network from your workstation. For more information on rlogin see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the fol- lowing at a command-line prompt: man rlogin Enter Networking Overview
1-23 ftp The ftp application is a user interface to the File T ransfer Protocol. Use ftp to copy files between your workstation and another computer system on the network. For more information see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man ftp Enter rcp The rcp application allows you to remotely copy files from another computer system on a network to your workstation. For more infor- mation see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the fol- lowing at a command-line prompt: man rcp Enter NFS The Network File System (NFS) allows your workstation to access files on remote computer systems as if they were on your local sys- tem. The file system on the remote computer system does not have to be compatible with your workstationâ s file system. For more informa- tion see Installing and Administering NFS Servers and HP-UX System Administration T asks manuals.
2-1 Chapter 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive ⢠CD-ROM drive and media descriptions ⢠Loading and unloading a CD-ROM disc ⢠V erifying the CD-ROM drive operation ⢠Using device files ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Reading the busy light ⢠T roubleshooting
2-2 This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD-ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICE: Be sure you have read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. NOTICE: Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as r oot , con- tact your system administrator .
2-3 This section describes basic information needed for using the CD- ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage de- vice that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface. Controls and Featur es Figure 2â1 and T able 2â1 describe the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drive. Headphone Jack V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole Figur e 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Contr ols and Featur es CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descrip- tions
2-4 T able 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Operating Contr ols and Features Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5 mm diame- ter miniature stereo plug into this jack. Use the volume control to adjust the audio output vol- ume to the headphone jack. The Busy Indicator lights during a data access opera- tion and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: î A defective disc î A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) î No disc present Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and in- sert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . By inserting the end of a paper clip, you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power . The disc tray holds the CD-ROM disc. This style of CD-ROM drive does not use a disc caddy . The disc tray does not open if the workstation power is off. îîîîîîîîî îî îîîî î îîîîîî NOTICE: The V olume Control, Headphone Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD-ROM drive are supported through applications only . Headphone Jack V olume Control Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Disc T ray
2-5 CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access files and data stored on a CD- ROM disc, but you may not write files or data to a CD-ROM disc. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Al- ways be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and pro- long the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust par- ticles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section â Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions. CD-ROM discs are iden- tical to audio compact discs (CDs), except that they store computer data.
2-6 This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM Disc This section describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc. Loading a CD-ROM Disc This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1. Press and release the eject button on the CD-ROM drive. The disc tray opens partway , as shown in Figure 2â2. îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîî î î Figur e 2â2. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open Operating the CD-ROM Drive
2-7 2. Gently pull the disc tray fully open. 3. Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 2â3. Figur e 2â3. Placing the CD-ROM Disc in the Disc T ray 4. Press down gently on the center of the CD-ROM disc to make sure it is seated on the disc tray hub, shown in Figure 2â3.
2-8 5. Gently push the disc tray in until it is closed, as shown in Figure 2â4. Figur e 2â4. Disc T ray Closed
2-9 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc T o unload a disc from the Disc T ray , follow these steps: 1. Press and release the eject button on the CD-ROM drive. The disc tray opens approximately 1 inch, as shown in Figure 2â5. Figur e 2â5. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2. Gently pull the disc tray fully open.
2-10 3. Grasp the disc by the edges and lift it out of the disc tray , as shown in Figure 2â6. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. Figur e 2â6. Removing the CD-ROM Disc Fr om the Disc T ray
2-1 1 4. Gently push the disc tray in until it is closed, as shown in Figure 2â7. Figur e 2â7. Disc T ray Closed V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. The ioscan utility verifies the configuration of all drives.
2-12 T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd sdisk Enter .
2-13 After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/0.0 target 8/0.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/0.5 target 8/0.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/0.6 target 8/0.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.2 target 8/12/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/12/5.4 target 8/12/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/12/5.6 target 8/12/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see any SCSI disk drives it returns the follow- ing message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Prob- lems.â
2-14 Using Device Files Device files are special files that tell your system which pathway to use through the system hardware when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device files are available for use with your CDâ ROM drive, use the following procedure: NOTICE: The device file names will depend on the nam- ing conventions of your particular system. See âSCSI ID and Device File Information for HP- UX 10.20 or Laterâ in Chapter 1 of this book. 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager (SAM) window opens. Doubleâclick on Peripheral Devices â>. 3. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on CDâ ROM Drives â>. 4. The CDâROM Drives window opens. 5. In the list of CDâROM drives, click on the desired CDâROM drive to select it. 6. From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files. A window opens with a list of the device files for the selected CDâROM drive with an explanation of each one.
2-15 T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must first mount the disc. This applies to file system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with file system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted file sys- tem, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condi- tion and can also require rebooting the system. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root . If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1. Log in as root . If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2. Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 4. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Peripheral Devicesâ>. Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc SAM (System Adminis- tration Manager) is a util- ity that performs system administration tasks us- ing a windows graphical user interface.
2-16 5. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on Disks and File Systemsâ>. 6. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Doubleâclick on CDâROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CDâROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on thie system. Disks that are unmounted have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7. From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive. 8. The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9. Click on O K . 10. The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on O K . 11 . The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed.
2-17 Click on O K . Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted file system. Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted file system, you must mount the CD- ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition and may also require rebooting the system. 1. Log in as root . If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 3. The System Administration Manager window opens. Double- click on Peripheral Devices â>. 4. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems â> .
2-18 5. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on this system. 6. Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu. 7. A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Ye s . The system reboots. 8. Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray .
2-19 Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following happens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1. Light On â The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2. Light Flashing â The light flashes six times while a read test is performed on the disc. 3. Light Off â The light goes of f when the self test is com- plete. The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light flashes during normal activity with the system.
2-20 T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD- ROM drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
3-1 Chapter 3 Using Y our DDS T ape Drive ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Setting the write-protect tab on a data cassette ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Loading and unloading a data cassette ⢠Using device files ⢠Archiving data in compressed and non-compressed mode ⢠T roubleshooting ⢠Ordering information
3-2 This chapter describes how to perform tasks that archive to and trans- fer data from the optional DDS tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. W e assume the DDS tape drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 3. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cas- settes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
3-3 This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. Depending on your configuration, your DDS drive may be a DDS-DC drive, or a DDS-2 drive. NOTICE: In most cases, the information for using these drives is the same; however , in a few instances (such as the LED codes), the information dif- fers for each drive. For the purposes of this dis- cussion, wherever we refer to simply the âDDSâ drive, that information is for both drives. Whenever the information differs, we will specify whether the information refers to the DDS-DC or the DDS-2 drive. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is a 3 1/2-inch form factor DDS tape drive with data compression and a SCSI interface. It conforms to the DDS for- mat standard for storing computer data, and incorporates a data com- pression capability . Itâ s a high-capacity , high transfer-rate device for data storage on tape. Controls and Indicators Figure 3â1 shows the LEDs and eject button of the DDS drive. Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button Figur e 3â1. DDS Drive Contr ols and Indicators DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions
3-4 LEDs â DDS-DC Drive This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The front panel has two colored LEDs: the Cassette Light and the Drive Light. A green light indicates normal operation, and an amber light indicates a warning condition. Pulsing shows activity between the drive and the SCSI bus. If the Cassette Light (left LED) shows steady amber , it means that the cassette is write-protected. If the Drive Light (right LED) shows steady amber , this indicates a fault condition. T able 3â1 lists the LED codes and their meanings. T able 3â1. LED Display Codes â DDS-DC Drive Cassette Drive Meaning Light Light Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Write-Pr otect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure) Key OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber LEDs (light emitting diodes) indicate different activities or problems that occur with your workstation hardware
3-5 LED W arning Conditions â DDS-DC Drive The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warning condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high and the drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-T est (Failur e) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and contact your local service representative. Media W ear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of er- rors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to deter- mine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1. Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2. Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as de- scribed in the âCleaning the T ape Headsâ section, later in this chapter . 3. Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Cau- tion) signal displayed. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced.
3-6 4. If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your files using a new data cassette. 5. If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, then discard the data cassette and back up the files to a new data cassette. LEDs â DDS-2 The front panel has two colored LEDs: the T ape Light and the Clean/ Attention Light. The T ape Light flashes green to show activity (load- ing, unloading, reading, and writing). Steady green means a cartridge is loaded. The Clean/Attention Light flashes amber to indicate head cleaning is needed or a cartridge is near the end of its life. Steady amber means a hard fault. T able 3â2. LED Display Codes â DDS-2 Drive T ape Clean/ Meaning Light Attention Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Fault Key OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off Flashing Amber 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on, 1/4 sec off Any Any
3-7 Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently specified to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This trans- lates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consis- tently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multi- ple passes over sections of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts frequently . Cleaning the T ape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1. Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cassette and cleans the heads. At the end of the clean- ing cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2. W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times.
3-8 Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other HP workstation DDS tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data. Setting the Write-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write-protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cassette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 3â2. îîîî îîî îîîîî îîî îîîîîî îîîî îîî îîîî îîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî î Figur e 3â2. Setting the W rite-Pr otect T ab on a DDS T ape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 3â2. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette.
3-9 This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette in the DDS tape drive: 1. T urn on power to the tape drive. 2. Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 3â3. Eject Button Figur e 3â3. Loading a Data Cassette Operating the DDS T ape Drive
3-10 3. Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop flash- ing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 4. T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 3â3. The LEDs on the drive flash on and off. T en to twenty seconds later , the data cas- sette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cassette from the drive. V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation T ype the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd stape Enter
3-1 1 After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.3 target 8/12/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see any SCSI drives it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
3-12 Using Device Files Y our system has four default device files for use with your tape drive: two device files for noncompressed mode and two device files for compressed mode. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. If the SCSI address of your tape drive is not set to the factory default of SCSI ID 3, you must create a device file, then substitute the path- name of your device file in the examples that follow . Refer to the Sys- tem Administration T asks manual for information on how to create a device file. NOTICE: The device file names depend on the naming conventions of your particular system. See your Using HP-UX manuals for more information. Device Files â No Data Compression Y our system has two device files for using your tape drive with data compression turned off. The device files are named /dev/rmt/3m and /dev/rmt/3mn , and are set for SCSI ID 3. If you use the /dev/rmt/3m device file, the tape drive rewinds the data cassette every time the system releases the drive from its control. If you use the /dev/rmt/3mn device file, the drive does not rewind the data cassette. The tape stays where it was after the last operation. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. Determining A vailable Device Files 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Peripheral Devices â>. Device files are special files that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is.
3-13 3. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on T ape Drives â>. 4. The T ape Drive s window opens. 5. In the list of tape drives, clock on the desired tape drive to select it. 6. From the Action menu, click on S how Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device files for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
3-14 Device Files â Data Compression If you wish to use the data compression feature, use the device files /dev/rmt/3hc and /dev/rmt/3hcn , which are set for SCSI ID 3. If you use the /dev/rmt/3hc device file, the tape drive compresses the data and rewinds the data cassette every time the system releases the drive from its control. If you use the /dev/rmt/3hcn device file, the drive compresses the data, but does not rewind the data cassette. The tape stays where it was after the last operation. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. Archiving Data in Compr essed and Noncompressed Mode This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS- for- mat data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar com- mand and your tape driveâ s device file. NOTICE: Before using your DDS-format tape drive to back up your file system, make sure you read the âMedia Interchangeability Restrictionsâ section later in this chapter . The tar (tape file archiver) command allows you to save files to a data cassette, restore files from a data cassette to your system, or list files on your data cassette. The tar (tape file archiv- er) command saves files to a data cassette, re- stores files from a data cassette, or lists files on a data cassette.
3-15 Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save files to a data cassette: 1. Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3. In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar âcvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam , and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device file names that sam listed as sup- porting compression. . Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System Use the following instructions to restore files from a data cassette to your system: 1. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2. In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory in which you want the files to reside. 3. Enter the following command line: tar âxvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname Enter
3-16 where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam , and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speci- fied, everything on the data cassette is restored. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device file names that sam listed as supporting compression..
3-17 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the files on a data cassette: 1. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command line to re- ceive a file listing of the data cassette: tar âtvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile Enter where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam . If the tape was made with data compression, use on the the device file names that sam listed as supporting compression.
3-18 Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the follow- ing: man tar Enter Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt , and fbackup commands. For more information on these com- mands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command Enter Media Interchangeability Restrictions If you interchange media between DDS-format tape drives, the fol- lowing two restrictions apply to the media: ⢠Data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities, such as the tape drive (part number C1504â67201) found in Kit A2275A #AHS. ⢠Full height (5 1/4-in) DDS-format tape drives (models HP 35470A and HP35480A) can get 1.3 GB and can read or write to 60-meter data cassettes only , if they are not using data com- pression. W ith data compression, these drives can get 2 GB and can read or write to 90-meter cassettes. T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â The man utility looks up man pages on the sys- tem.
3-19 Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A Box of five 60âmeter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B Box of five 90âmeter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A Box of five 120-meter DDS data cassettes (for DDS-2 drive only) ⢠HP92283K Package of two cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
4-1 Chapter 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive ⢠Setting the write-protect tab on a diskette ⢠Inserting and removing a diskette ⢠V erifying the floppy disk drive configuration ⢠Using device files ⢠Floppy disk drive device file ⢠Formatting a new diskette ⢠T ransferring data to and from a floppy diskette ⢠Configuring the floppy driver ⢠T roubleshooting ⢠Ordering information
4-2 This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch floppy disk drive. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICES: When examples of user input are given in this chapter , enter them at the command-line prompt in an HP VUE terminal window or HP-UX shell. Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as r oot , con- tact your system administrator .
4-3 This section describes basic information needed for using your floppy diskettes. Setting the Write-Protect T ab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write posi- tion, as shown in Figure 4â1. Push tab up for write . Push tab down for write-protect . Figur e 4â1. Setting the W rite-Pr otect T ab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect files on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write- protect tab to the write-pr otect position. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Using the Floppy Diskette
4-4 Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the floppy disk drive: 1. Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 4â2. Eject Button Figur e 4â2. Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2. Push the diskette into the floppy drive until it clicks into place. 3. T o remove the diskette, push the eject button (see Figure 4â2), then take out the diskette.
4-5 This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch floppy disk drive. V erifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the floppy drive, use the ioscan command in a terminal window to see which devices are currently in use on your system: 1. Enter the following at a command prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd sflop Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI floppy I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.0 target 8/12/5.0.0 disk TEAC FC-1 HF 07 If ioscan does not see any SCSI drives it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Prob- lems.â Operating the Floppy Drive The ioscan utility verifies the configuration of all drives.
4-6 If the floppy driver is not configured, ioscan returns the follow- ing message: ioscan: Device driver scsifloppy is not in the kernel If you receive this message, go the the section, âConfiguring the Floppy Driverâ later in this chapter for information on adding the scsifloppy driver to the HP-UX kernel configuration. Using Device Files Device files are special files that tell your system which pathway to use through the system hardware when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is. NOTICE: The device file names depend on the naming conventions of your particular system. See âSCSI ID and Device File Information for HP- UX 10.20 or Laterâ in Chapter 1 of this book. If you set the SCSI address of your floppy drive to a value other than 0, you must create a device file for it. Refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual for information on how to create a device file. T o determine what device files are available for use with your floppy drive, use the following procedure: 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Disks and File Systemsâ>. 3. The Disk and File Systems window opens.
4-7 4. In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5. From the Actions menu, click on V iew More Information. A window opens with a list of information for the floppy drive, inlcuding the device files.
4-8 Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new floppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new floppy diskette follow these steps: 1. Log in as root. 2. Make sure that the write-protect tab on the floppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 4â1. 3. Insert the diskette into the floppy disk drive. 4. In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit âi 2 devicefile Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam. T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your floppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your floppy driveâ s device file. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the files on a diskette. The tar (tape file archiv- er) command saves files to a floppy diskette, re- stores files from a floppy diskette, or lists files on a floppy diskette.
4-9 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save files to a floppy diskette: 1. Check that the write-protect tab on the floppy diskette is in the write position. 2. Load the formatted floppy diskette into the disk drive. 3. In a terminal window enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar âcvf devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to write to the diskette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System Use the following instructions to restore files from a floppy diskette to your system: 1. Load the floppy diskette into the disk drive. 2. In a terminal window , use the cd command to change to the di- rectory you want the files to reside in: cd dir ectory_path Enter where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory . 3. Enter the following command line:
4-10 tar âxvf devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to restore from the diskette. If you do not specify path- name , everything on the floppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the files on a floppy diskette: 1. Load the floppy diskette into the disk drive. 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar âtvf devicefile Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam All files on the floppy diskette are listed. For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the com- mand arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man tar Enter Y ou can mount the floppy drive as a file system using the SAM util- ity . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a file system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the floppy drive, see the manual Using HP-UX (B2910â90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your floppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: The man utility looks up man pages on the sys- tem.
4-1 1 man cpio Enter For more information on copying to or from DOS files, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp Enter For more information on listing DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls Enter For more information on using your floppy disk drive and floppy dis- kettes, refer to the floppy man page by typing the following in a ter- minal window: man floppy Enter For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the mediainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit Enter
4-12 Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your workstation, you need to reconfigure the HP-UX Kernel to add the floppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the SCSI flexible disk driv- er and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconfigure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355â90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910â90001) T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your floppy disk drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro flexible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch floppy disk drive, use the following order number: HPâ92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) â box of ten diskettes
5-1 Chapter 5 Solving Pr oblems ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Memory failures ⢠LCD-indicated problems ⢠Running system verification tests
5-2 This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for ser- vice, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 graphical interface. If your system is configured with the HP CDE graphical user interface, use command line options in a terminal win- dow to perform tests. NOTICE: The J282/2240 power supply draws about 50 W atts in standby mode(system of f) and will turn on a fan when required to cool the supply . NOTICE: The J282/2240 fan failure circuitry requires that the power cord must be disconnected for 30 seconds after any fan failure.
5-3 The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the problems. T able 5â1. Pr oblems Powering Up the System Problem Solution The power LED doesnât light. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or flickers LCD messages Make sure all ac power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working ac outlet. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B for in- formation about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor configura- tion. See âLCD-Indicated Problemsâ later in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative. Common Problems and Solutions
5-4 T able 5â2. Pr oblems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two min- utes have passed with no sign of system activity . The system stops or hangs while booting. Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are cor- rectly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failure, â later in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-5 T able 5â3. Pr oblems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Canât reach other systems on the net- work. Applications that rely on the net- work wonât run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-6 T able 5â4. Pr oblems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative. Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Ap- pendix C for default SCSI ID set- tings.) Check that all SCSI devices are cor- rectly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Ap- pendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failure â later in this chapter .
5-7 T able 5â5. Pr oblems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them cor- rectly . Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section entitled â Running System V erifica- tion T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the CD-ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-8 T able 5â6. Pr oblems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you specified the cor- rect device file name for commands that require a device file name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Ap- pendix B. Follow the instructions in the section entitled âRunning System V erification T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning prop- erly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-9 T able 5â7. Pr oblems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The floppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you specified the de- vice file /dev/rfloppy/c201d0s0 for commands that require a device file name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a floppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section entitled â Running System V erification T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the floppy drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-10 If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1. Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2. At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > search ipl Enter This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. 3. Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > boot device Enter where device is the hardwar e path to the device, specified in mnemonic style notation, such as FWSCSI.5.0. 4. If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the file system or with the hardware. If you suspect a file system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with file system failures. If you think that something is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more troubleshooting information. Dealing with a Boot Failure The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation.
5-1 1 J Class systems use Memory Page Deallocation, a feature that allows the system to provide information to the operating system about memory failures. HP-UX 10.20 uses Memory Page Deallocation information to map out the failing memory areas, and continue normal operation. Y ou can use the command memrpt with the detail switch to obtain informa- tion about the Memory Page Deallocation T able (PDT) as well as single bit errors logged by the system. # /usr/sbin/sysdiag Enter DUI >logtool Enter LOGTOOL> memrpt detail Enter NOTICE: Y ou must be logged in as superuser to use the memrpt command. T o exit the sysdiag and logtool utilities, use the exit command. The pdt can also be checked using the pdt command in the Service menu of the boot console handler . If a failing DIMM is replaced, use the Service menu pdt clear command to clear out the PDT . Memory Failures
5-12 Y our workstation uses an LCD panel to display firmware/OS progress codes. The codes, referred to as chassis codes, consist of one of the mnemonics listed below , followed by a 4-digit hex number identify- ing the code module being executed. The mnemonics and their mean- ing are: ⢠FL T â A hardware error has been detected ⢠TEST â Hardware being tested ⢠INIT â Hardware being initialized ⢠SHUT â System being shutdown ⢠W ARN â A non-optimal operating condition exists ⢠RUN â System is running operating system During a normal boot sequence, a set of âwindowsâ appear . In gener- al, the LCD display has the following format: â î îîî î â î îîî î îîîî îîîî î î î îî ⥠îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîîîîîî ZZZZ > 4 character OSTAT YYYY > 4 digit hex code CPUXX > Functional CPUs in system ⥠> Heart beat WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW > Text Diagnostic Message LCD-Indicated Problems
5-13 The windows are as follows: Window 1 When the system is hard booted, the LCD will be cleared and the fol- lowing message will be displayed for approximately 1 second. Then the processor dependent hardware (pdh) is verified. Proceeding To <â line 1 Turn DC On <â line 2 Window 2 While the pdh is being verified, the following message is displayed: ZZZZ YYYY <â line 1 Selftest Sys Bd <â line 2 Window 3 After the pdh is verified, the selftest is executed. The display changes to: ZZZZ YYYY ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change Selftest <â line 2 Window 4 When the selftest is complete, the message (once the console is found) is: ZZZZ YYYY CPUXX ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change AAAAAAAA console <â line 2 where AAAAAA is RS-232A, RS-232B, or GRAPHICS.
5-14 Window 5 When an attempt to boot is made, the following message is displayed once IPL is successfully loaded and launched: ZZZZ YYYY CPUXX ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB <â line 2 where BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB is the model number (for example, 9000/J200). If the system encounters an FL T code while the system is booting, the FL T code is interpreted and a messages is displayed. For the meaning of the fault code, see the J Class Service Handbook.
5-15 HP-UX uses a diagnostics product called the Support T ools Manager that allows system operation verification. Y ou can access the Support T ools Manager in a terminal window . If you are using HP VUE as your interface, you can also access the Sup- port T ools Manager through the sys_admin directory . Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven interface (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the online man pages by entering the following at a command line prompt: man cstm Enter man mstm Enter man xstm Enter T o access the Support T ools Manager , perform the following steps: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control Running System V erification T ests
5-16 A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: cstm Enter The following screen appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 4. T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Enter Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 5. Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported.
5-17 6. T o exit the Support T ools Manager , type the following: CSTM> exit Enter If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualified service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
A-1 Appendix A Safety and Regulatory Statements ⢠Declaration of conformity ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠W arnings and cautions This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your J282/2240 workstation.
A-2
A-3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Canadian Department of Communications. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor- dance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certification tests were conducted with HP- supported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to com- ply with the requirements of the FCC. Emissions Regulations
A-4 Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in ac- cordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations statements. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom. Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines â3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa <70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19 VCCI CLASS 2 Emissions Regulations Compliance Acoustics
A-5 Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following precautions during board unpacking and installation: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dischar ged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective anti- static bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have re- moved them from their protective antistatic bags. The V isible LED on this product is classified as â Class 1 LED PRODUCT â in accordance with EN 60825â1 . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions V isible LEDs
A-6 (For workstations that have a CD ROM drive installed.) The CD-ROM mass storage system is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Contr ol for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass storage system is completely confined within protective housings and exter- nal covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) IEC 825 Class 1 Laser Label
A-7 W ARNING: Removing device cover may expose sharp edges in equipment chassis. T o avoid injury , use care when installing customer add-on devices. W ARNUNG: Das Entfernen der Geräteabdeckung legt die scharfen Kanten im Inneren des Gerätes frei. Um V erietzungen zu vermeiden, seien Sie vorsichtig beim Einbau von zusätzlichen Bauteilen, die vom Kunden selber eingebaut werden können. A VER TISSEMENT : Des bords tranchants du châssis de lâéquipement peuvent être exposés quand le cache de lâunité nâest pas en place. Pour éviter des blessures, faire très attention lors de lâinstallation de modules supplémentaires par le client. W ARNING: Disconnect power plug from wall outlet or power source before moving or removing the device, or installing add-on components. W ARNUNG: Entfernen Sie die Stromzuführung von der Steckdose oder der Stromquelle bevor Sie das Gerät bewegen, abbauen, oder zusätzliche Bauteile installieren. A VER TISSEMENT : Débrancher la fiche de la prise de courant ou de la source dâalimentation électrique avant de déplacer ou de retirer lâunité, ou avant dâinstaller des modules supplémentaires. W ARNING: Lithium batteries may explode if mistreated. Do not put lithium batteries in fires or try to recharge or disassemble them. Replace battery only with Matsushita Electric BRâ2325 three-volt lithium battery (HP part number 1420â0314)! Use of any other battery may cause fire or explosion. W arnings and Cautions
A-8
B-1 Appendix B Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardware Configuration ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Opening the system unit ⢠Closing the system unit ⢠Installing removable media devices ⢠Adding a hard drive ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing an EISA or graphics board ⢠Changing your monitor type
B-2 This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hardware configuration. The instructions in this appendix assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconfiguring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your configuration: ⢠Light-duty flat blade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 in.) blade ⢠Number 1 Posi-drive driver ⢠T10, T15, and T20 T orx drivers ⢠Needlenose pliers Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
B-3 T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single- click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âf Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: Checking the SCSI IDs
B-4 Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ========================================================================== bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/12 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/12/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/12/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/12/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/12/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/12/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/12/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/12/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/12/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/12/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/12/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/12/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/12/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/12/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter graphics 0 10/0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics graphics 1 10/8 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 7 10/20/5/3.0.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 8 10/20/5/3.1.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 9 10/20/5/3.2.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
B-5 4. Y ou can determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by look- ing under the H/W Path heading. The J2240 lists 8/4/19/0 as the built-in SCSI bus controller . For devices connected to the built- in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/4/19/0.6 .0 tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 6 on the SCSI bus. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any device. Ad- dress 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
B-6 Perform the following steps to open the system unit: 1. Power off the system, the monitor , and any peripheral devices. Unplug the system unit power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices from ac wall outlets. Refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for the proper method of shutting down your work- station. 2. Attach the static-grounding wrist strap by following the instruc- tions on the package. Attach the sticky end of the wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 3. Press down on the two buttons on the top front of the worksta- tion, releasing the front panel (also known as the front bezel) as shown in Figure Bâ1. Opening the System Unit
B-7 Figur e Bâ1. Removing the Fr ont Panel 4. Swing the panel down and pull up slightly so the two guide pins on the bottom clear their guides and lay the front cover down.
B-8 Perform the following steps to close the system unit: CAUTION: Do not attempt to operate the workstation with the front cover removed. The cover is needed for proper air flow for system cooling. 1. Insert the two guide pins on the bottom of the front cover into the guides on the bottom of the system unit. 2. Swing the front cover up, and push it firmly into the workstation housing. The front panel edges automatically align with the workstation housing, and the top latch buttons pop up into posi- tion. See Figure Bâ2. NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that the top latches snap completely into position. Closing the System Unit
B-9 Figur e Bâ2.Replacing the Front Panel 3. Reconnect the power cables and any other cables that you dis- connected when opening the workstation, then power on any pe- ripherals, the monitor , and the system unit.
B-10 Y our workstation can have any two of the following removable media devices, with no two the same: ⢠CD-ROM drive ⢠2 to 8 GB, 4 mm DDS tape drive ⢠3.5-inch Floppy disk drive Follow these steps for installing any of the removable media drives into the Storage Assembly . The steps for checking and setting drive jumpers are different for each drive. Jumper information for each drive is included in these steps. NOTICE: Before opening the system unit, follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDs,â earlier in this appendix, to determine the SCSI IDs currently in use on your workstation. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in âOpening the System Unit,â earlier in this appendix. 2. Unscrew the two captive screws on the left side of the Storage Assembly and pull down the drawer ejector handle on the right side of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ3. The Storage Assembly slides partway out of the drawer . Installing Removable Media Devices
B-1 1 î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ3.Removing Storage Drawer fr om System Unit 3. Pull the Storage Assembly out as far as it will go. (A safety catch prevents the drawer from coming all the way out.) NOTICE: When sliding the Storage Assembly out of the system unit, move the drawer ejector handle to prevent the Storage Assembly from hitting it. 4. Push in on the safety catch and continue pulling the drawer out. Be sure to support the drawer from the bottom.
B-12 5. Set the drawer on a flat surface. 6. Disconnect the power distribution cable from the Fan extender cable. î îîîî îîîîîîîî î îîîî îîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîî Figur e Bâ4.Removing F AN fr om EMI Plate 7. Disconnect the Fan extender cable form the SCSI PCA.
B-13 îî îî îîî îî îî îîî Figur e Bâ5.Removing EMI Plate 8. Remove the two Mâ3 screws from the fan.
B-14 Figur e Bâ6.Removing F AN/EMI Plate 9. Unscrew the captive screw holding the F AN/EMI plate at the back of the removable drives and lift the plate up and out of the drawer , as shown in Figure Bâ6. 10. Disconnect the SCSI and power cables from the drive.
B-15 11 . Unscrew the two screws holding the drive in the storage drawer , and slide the drive out of the drawer . See Figure Bâ7. Figur e Bâ7.Removing Drive Scr ews 12. Check the SCSI address/jumper settings on the replacement drive, using the following information sections.
B-16 CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 2. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 2 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: CD-ROM drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the CD-ROM drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the CD-ROM driveâ s address, follow these instructions, referring to Figure Bâ8. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address, go to Step 10 of this installation pro- cedure. 1. Locate the jumpers at the back of the CD-ROM drive. 2. T o change the address, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your CD-ROM driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive.
B-17 SCSI ID 3 2 default 1 4 5 6 SCSI ID 0 Figur e Bâ8.CD-ROM Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings
B-18 DDS T ape Drive The DDS tape drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 3 and the Operation Mode switches set for correct drive opera- tion. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 3 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: SCSI tape drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the DDS tape drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the DDS tape driveâ s address or operation mode, follow these instructions, referring to Figure Bâ9 for the DDS-DC drive, Figure Bâ10 for the DDS-2 drive, and Figure Bâ1 1 for operation mode. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address or operation mode, go to Step 10 of this installa- tion procedure. 1. Locate the jumpers at the back of the DDS tape drive. 2. T o change the jumper settings, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your DDS tape driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive. 4. If you need to change the Operation Mode switches, locate the switches on the underside of the DDS tape drive. Switches 1 and 2 are used to configure the data compression operation mode. Switches 3 through 8 are used to specify drive connectivity and functionality according to host or customer requirements. The default setting is all switches ON. Figure NO T AG shows the available options.
B-19 T arget ID Jumpers 0 1 2 3 Jumpers 4 5 6 T arget ID SCSI T erminators (must be removed) (Default) T erm PWR ID2 ID1 ID0 ID2 ID1 ID0 T erm PWR Figur e Bâ9.DDS-DC T ape Drive SCSI Addr ess/Jumper Settings
B-20 SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SCSI ID (Default) T erm PWR* Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 T erm PWR* SCSI Connector Power Connector Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0 T erm PWR *T erm PWR is not used in HP workstation configurations. Figur e Bâ10.DDS-2 T ape Drive and SCSI Addr ess/Jumper Settings
B-21 Operation Mode Switches ON 1 23 456 78 ON 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 Compression Disabled, No Host Control Compression Enabled, No Host Control Compression Disabled, Host Can Control Compression Compression Enabled, With Host Control îî îîîîî îî îîîîî ON 1 23 456 78 ON 1 23 456 78 Figur e Bâ1 1.Switch Settings for Data Compression Operation Mode
B-22 Floppy Drive The floppy disk drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 0. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 0 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: Floppy disk drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the floppy disk drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the floppy disk driveâ s address, follow these instructions, referring to Figures Bâ12 and Bâ13. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address, go to Step 10 of this installation procedure. 1. Locate the jumpers on the top of the floppy drive. 2. T o change the jumpers, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your floppy driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive.
B-23 SCSI ID Address Jumpers à à à T op V iew of Floppy Disk Drive î î ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 Jumper in = 0; out = 1 SCSI ID Address Jumpers ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 Jumpers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SCSI ID Address î Figur e Bâ12.Floppy Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings
B-24 Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã T op V iew of Floppy Disk Drive 1 2 3 SCSI T erminators Figur e Bâ13.Floppy Drive T erminators
B-25 13. Figure Bâ14 shows the orientation of each of the removable me- dia drives in the bracket and the position of the screws holding the drive bracket in place. The same bracket can be used on all three drives. îîîîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ14.Attaching Removable Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation
B-26 14. W ith the disk mounting bracket between the guides on each side of the Storage Assembly , slide the disk into the Storage Assem- bly , securing it with the two side screws. See Figure Bâ15. Do not over-tighten the side screws. Reconnect the drive SCSI and power cables here. Figur e Bâ15.Replacing Drive Scr ews 15. Reconnect the cabling from the back of the drive to the side of the drawer assembly . See Figure NO T AG. 16. Secure the EMI plate at the back of the removable drives with the captive screw in the bottom of the plate. 17. Slide the drawer back in.
B-27 18. Push the drawer ejector handle up until the Storage Assembly slides all the way into the system unit and secure the two captive screws on the left of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ16. NOTICE: If the ejector handle is not pushed completely in, you may not have proper seating of the SCSI PCB interconnect to the backplane. î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ16.Replacing the Storage Drawer Assembly
B-28 19. Follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ earlier in this appendix, to verify that your workstation can see the newly installed drive. For information about using your drives see the following chapters in this book: ⢠Using your CD-ROM drive is in Chapter 3. ⢠Using your DDS tape drive is in Chapter 4. ⢠Using your floppy drive is in Chapter 5.
B-29 This section describes how to add a hard drive to your workstation. The first part deals with installing a hard drive and the second part tells you how to configure your hard disk after it is installed. Y our workstation can have two hard drives. The hard drive that came with your workstation was set to SCSI ID 6. If you are adding a se- cond hard disk, the second hard disk will use SCSI ID 5. If another device on your workstation is using SCSI ID 5, change the hard diskâ s SCSI ID to an unused SCSI ID. NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your hard driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. If you are adding a second hard drive, we advise you not to use SCSI ID 6 which is normally reserved for the boot disk drive. Check the jumpers on the hard drive you plan to install. Figure Bâ17 shows the correct SCSI address for the jumpers on your drive. These jumpers are the only jumpers you may need to change on the drive. 1. Use a pair of small needle-nose pliers to set the SCSI ID jumpers to SCSI ID 5 if you are adding a second hard drive, or SCSI ID 6 if this is the first hard drive (you are running diskless). Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . 2. If you removed the disk drive mounting bracket from the disk drive, replace it now , making sure not to over-tighten the screws. Figure Bâ18 shows the orientation of the drive in the bracket for both drives and the position of the screws holding the drive bracket in place. Be sure the printed circuit side of one drive is facing the printed circuit side of the other drive. Adding a Hard Drive
B-30 îîîîîîîî î î îî îî îîîîîîî 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 îîîîîîî îîîîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ17.T ypical Har d Drive Jumper Settings
B-31 PCB Side of Drive T op Drive Bottom Drive Figur e Bâ18.Replacing Hard Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation
B-32 Installing a Hard Disk Drive Perform the following steps to install a hard disk drive. NOTICE: Before opening the system unit, follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDs,â earlier in this appendix, to determine the SCSI IDs currently in use on your workstation. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in âOpening the System Unit,â earlier in this appendix. 2. Unscrew the two captive screws on the left side of the Storage Assembly and pull down the drawer ejector handle on the right side of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ19. The Storage Assembly slides partway out of the drawer .
B-33 î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ19.Removing Storage Drawer fr om System Unit 3. Pull the Storage Assembly out as far as it will go. (A safety catch prevents the drawer from coming all the way out.) NOTICE: When sliding the Storage Assembly out of the system unit, move the drawer ejector handle to prevent the Storage Assembly from hitting it. 4. Press in on the safety catch on each side of the drawer to allow the drawer all the way out and place the drawer on a flat surface.
B-34 5. Be sure you have already checked the SCSI ID of the drive you want to install using the method described at the beginning of this section. 6. W ith the disk mounting bracket between the guides on each side of the Storage Assembly , slide the disk into the Storage Assem- bly , securing it to the drawer with two side screws. See Figure Bâ20. Do not over-tighten the side screws. The drives should be placed in the drive bays with the bottom of each drive toward the middle, as shown in Figure Bâ20. Refer to Figure Bâ18 for drive orientation in the bracket. Figur e Bâ20.Placing Har d Drives in Storage Drawer
B-35 7. Reconnect the SCSI and power cables from the back of the drive to the side of the drawer assembly . 8. Slide the drawer back in and secure. 9. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix. 10. Follow the instructions in the âChecking the SCSI IDsâ subsec- tion to verify that your workstation can see the hard drive. Configuring a Hard Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a file system using SAM. For more information about configuring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administration T asks manual. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator . 1. Log in as root. 2. Move the mouse pointer to the up arrow above the T oolbox control and click the left mouse button. T oolbox Control Up Arrow
B-36 3. The T oolbox subpanel opens. Click on the General toolbox icon, shown below . 4. A file manager window appears with a number of icons in it. Double-click on the System_Admin toolbox icon. 5. Move the mouse cursor to the SAM icon shown below (your icon can look like either of these) and double-click the left mouse button. 6. The System Administration Manager window opens. Double- click on Peripheral Devices â>. 7. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on Disks and File Systems â> . 8. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . SAM (System Adminis- tration Manager) is a util- ity that performs system administration tasks us- ing a windows graphical user interface.
B-37 The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on this system. 9. From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive. 10. The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your sys- tem. 11 . Click on O K . 12. The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on O K . 13. The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on O K .
B-38 T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory: ⢠Before trying to install additional memory DIMMs in your J282/2240 workstation, use the procedure described in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory configuration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory DIMMs before you begin. ⢠DIMMs must be inserted in the order shown. Refer to Figure Bâ24. ⢠Y ou must insert DIMMs in pairs of equal size. ⢠Be aware that it is possible to insert the DIMMs backwards into the connectors. Be sure therefore, that you understand the prop- er orientation for DIMMs going into the connectors. See Figure Bâ25. ⢠When you have finished installing additional DIMMs, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the work- station. Perform the following steps to add memory DIMMs to your worksta- tion. Note the instructions in Step 8 of this section on DIMM configu- ration before beginning these steps. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in the âOpening the System Unitâ section earlier in this appendix. 2. Remove the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . 3. Release the ejector tabs on the left side, top and bottom of the CPU Assembly . Refer to Figure Bâ21. Installing Additional Memory
B-39 Ejector T ab Ejector T ab Figur e Bâ21.Removing the CPU Assembly 4. Pull the CPU Assembly straight out and place on a flat surface with an antistatic mat. NOTICE: The CPU Assembly is heavy , very warm and has no safety catch. Be sure to pull it out slow- ly , making sure it is properly supported. 5. Use Figure Bâ22 to locate the memory DIMMs on the CPU As- sembly .
B-40 Memory Bracket Memory DIMMs Figur e Bâ22.Memory Retention Bracket and Memory DIMM Loca- tion NOTICE: When installing DIMMs you need to orient the notch toward the white ejector handles. 6. T o install a new memory DIMM, turn the CPU assembly until the memory DIMMs are in the position shown in Figure Bâ23.
B-41 î îîîîî îîî î î îîîîîîîî îîîîî Figur e Bâ23.CPU Assembly Orientation 7. Refer to the Position Guide on the CPU board that states, â<ââ POSITION MEM MODULE AS SHOWN,â as shown in Figure Bâ23. 8. Install pairs of DIMMs in the following order: Pair 1 (0A, 0B), Pair 2 (1A, 1B), Pair 3 (2A, 2B), and so on. This workstation has 16 memory slots, labeled 0A, 0B through 7A, 7B. Memory DIMMs must be installed in pairs of equal size, with the largest pairs installed first, followed in order from lar g- est to smallest pairs. Figure Bâ24 gives the recommended order for installing pairs of DIMMs. Any Combination of memory may be used, although, for maxi- mum performance, we recommend using common-sized memory DIMMs; for example, either all 128 MB, 256 MB, or 512 MB DIMM pairs. Therefore, to achieve both maximum performance
B-42 and maximum future capacity , use 512 MB DIMM pairs exclu- sively . Front of System 3B 7B 3A 7A 5B 1B 5A 1A 2B 6B 2A 6A 4B 0B 4A 0A Pair 4 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 1 Pair 8 Pair 6 Pair 7 Pair 5 CPU Modules J18 J17 J16 J15 J31 J30 J29 J28 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J20 J19 Figur e Bâ24. Memory DIMM Sequence 9. Open the ejector tab by pressing down on it at the left of the con- nector . Refer to Figure Bâ25.
B-43 10. Place the DIMM in the connector , lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put the notched end toward the white ejector han- dle (to the left). îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîî îîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ25.Installing Memory Cards 11 . Close the ejector tab. 12. Press firmly and evenly on the DIMM to ensure that it seats properly . 13. T o replace the CPU Assembly in the system unit, first align the top of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. Re- fer to Figure Bâ26 and to the label on the back of the assembly . Be sure to support the CPU Assembly properly while replacing it.
B-44 Figur e Bâ26.Replacing the CPU Assembly
B-45 Next, align the bottom of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. W ith the ejector latches in the open position, slide the CPU Assembly into the system unit as far as it will go. See Figure Bâ26. 14. Press the ejector tabs all the way in and press on the left edge of the processor module sheet metal to ensure that the processor module is completely seated in the connector . Replace the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Make sure the ejec- tors are completely depressed to ensure proper connector seating. 15. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix. 16. T o verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D of this book, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on dis- playing memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty DIMM, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >. â
B-46 Perform the following steps to replace the processor module on your workstation: 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in the âOpening the System Unitâ section earlier in this appendix. 2. Remove the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Ejector T ab Ejector T ab Figur e Bâ27.Removing the CPU Assembly 3. Release the ejector latches on the left side, top, and bottom of the CPU Assembly . Refer to Figure Bâ27. Replacing the Processor Module
B-47 4. Pull the CPU Assembly straight out and place on a flat surface with an antistatic mat. 5. Locate the CPU shroud as shown in Figure Bâ28. Shroud Figur e Bâ28.CPU Shr oud Location J282/2240 6. Disconnect the fan cable(s) from the system board. NOTICE: Be sure to reconnect the fan cables when you have finished installing the processor . The fan not being connected will cause the system to shut down after about 15 seconds of operation. 7. Remove the two screws attaching the shroud cover to the shroud, then slide cover off. Set the shroud cover aside.
B-48 NOTICE: The Model 282 and 2240 can be configured with two processors. A single processor must be located in slot 0. Do not mix 282 and 2240 processors in the same system. 8. When replacing a processor module, you must also remove the dust cover it was shipped with. Grasp the module and pull the dust cover evenly to remove. 9. Install the processor by aligning the plastic guide rails on the shroud with the rails on the processor . firmly seat module. Figur e Bâ29.J282/2240 Pr ocessor Modules
B-49 10. Insert the board containing the processor module into the guides and press firmly into place. 11 . Reconnect the fan cable to the system board. 12. Replace the CPU shroud over the processor and replace the four screws attaching the CPU shroud to the system board 13. T o replace the CPU Assembly in the system unit, first align the top of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. Re- fer to Figure Bâ30 and to the label on the back of the assembly . Be sure to support the CPU Assembly properly while replacing it. Figur e Bâ30.Replacing the CPU Assembly
B-50 Next, align the bottom of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. W ith the ejector latches in the open position, slide the CPU Assembly into the system unit as far as it will go. See Figure Bâ30. 14. Press the ejector tabs all the way in and press on the left edge of the processor module sheet metal to ensure that the processor module is completely seated in the connector . Replace the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Make sure the ejec- tors are completely depressed to ensure proper connector seating. 15. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix.
B-51 Y our J282 workstationâ s EISA Assembly has five slots. Four are EISA slots; of these, two are EISA-only and two are EISA/GSC slots. The bottom slot is GSC only . Y our J2240 workstationâ s PCI Assembly has five slots. All five slots support PCI cards. Three slots support 32âbit PCI and two support 64âbit PCI. T wo of the 64âbit slots and one of the 32âbit slots sup- port GSC. Slot 4 also optionally supports EISA. NOTICE: The 32âbit PCI slots expect 5.0V signalling, while the 64âbit PCI slots expect 3.3V signal- ling The graphics boards supported by your workstation provide: ⢠HP VISUALIZE EG- Fast 2D graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZE-8/24 Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZE-48 24/24 Image plane, 24âbit Z buffer ,3D graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZEâFX2, âFX4, âFX6 (J2240 only) NOTICE: Dual graphics boards take up two slots. Other graphics boards may take one, two or three slots. Figures Bâ31, Bâ32 and Bâ33 show the physical layout of the EISA/ GSC slots, first from outside the system unit, then from inside the PCI and EISA Assemblies. Installing an EISA, PCI or Graphics Board
B-52 4 3 2 1 0 graphics 2 graphics 3 graphics 1 graphics 0 Physical Slot Numbers On Outside of System Figur e Bâ31.EISA/PCI/GSC Slots from Outside the EISA/PCI Assem- bly Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 4 GSC Slots EISA Slots Bottom of EISA Assembly Slot Numbers on Board Figur e Bâ32.EISA/GSC Slots from Inside the J282 EISA Assembly
B-53 Figur e Bâ33.GSC/PCI/EISA Slots from inside the J2240 PCI Assem- bly Physical slot 0 is always reserved for graphics cards only . graphics0 Graphics device in slot 0. If using a Dual Graphics Card, this is the port to the right on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics1 Graphics device in slot 1. If using a Dual Graphics Card, this is the port to the right on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics2 Graphics device in slot 2. If there is a Dual Graphics Card in slot 1, this is the port to the left on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics3 This is a logical slot, and can only be reached by using the left port of a Dual Graphics Card in physical slot 0.
B-54 Follow these steps to install a PCI, EISA or graphics board into your workstation: 1. W orking from the rear of the workstation, unscrew the four cap- tive screws and pull the PCI/EISA Assembly straight out using the handle. See Figure Bâ34. Figur e Bâ34.Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly
B-55 Figur e Bâ35. PCI/EISA I/O Assembly
B-56 2. Rotate the unit 90 degrees clockwise and place on a flat surface, as shown in Figure Bâ36. Figur e Bâ36.Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly for Installation
B-57 3. Unscrew one screw at the back of the cover and lift the cover up and out to remove it from the PCI/EISA Assembly . See Figure Bâ37. Figur e Bâ37.Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly Cover
B-58 4. Unscrew one screw at the top of the slot cover and pull the cover straight up to remove it. See Figure Bâ38. Figur e Bâ38.Removing the PCI/EISA Slot Cover
B-59 5. Place PCI, GSC, or EISA board you are installing in the board guides and slide firmly into the connector . Check to see the board is evenly inserted to seat properly . See Figure Bâ39. Figur e Bâ39.Installing a PCI, GSC, or EISA or Graphics Board in the PCI/EISA Assembly 6. Secure board with one screw in top of board connector bracket.
B-60 7. (J2240 Only) Before installing cover , if you installed an EISA, or graphics board that is taller than a PCI card remove the small breakâoff block from the cover that corresponds to that slot. Re- fer to Figure Bâ40. Figur e Bâ40.Remove Block from PCI Assembly Cover
B-61 8. Insert cover in guide and secure with screw . Refer to Figure Bâ41. îî îîî Figur e Bâ41.Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly Cover
B-62 9. Rotate the unit back 90 degrees as shown in Figure Bâ42 and grasp the handle. Figur e Bâ42.Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly Back
B-63 10. Slide the PCI/EISA Assembly into the system unit and secure it with the four captive screws. See Figure Bâ43. Figur e Bâ43.Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly
B-64 Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a spe- cific resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a dif- ferent type, you must reconfigure your workstation to support it There are two ways to configure your workstation to support a differ- ent monitor type: Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters before you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On If you ⢠replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different monitor type, and ⢠do not set the workstationâ s graphics parameters by using the monitor command before doing so, then press Ta b after your keyboardâ s lights flash during the boot process to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. Y our system queries you for the new monitor type. Select the new type by pressing Enter . The system queries you to confirm your selection. Press y to save this monitor type. If you donât press y , the system cycles through the other monitor types, some of which your monitor wonât display . W ait for the workstation to display your monitor type again, then select it. Changing Y our Monitor T ype
B-65
C-1 Appendix C SCSI Connections ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports
C-2 This appendix provides information about connecting Small Comput- er System Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. If no external devices are attached, the SCSI connector on the rear of the system must be terminated with the terminator that was shipped with your workstation.
C-3 A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external devices (SCSI devices) running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are floppy disk drives, 4-mm DDS- format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W inchester hard disk drives. There are three types of SCSI buses available with this workstation â a narrow , single-ended (NSE) SCSI bus, a fast, wide differential (FWD) SCSI bus, and an ultraâfast, wide, singleâended (UWSE) SCSI bus. T able Câ1 shows the specification differences between these SCSI buses, and T able Câ2 shows the SCSI addresses, ID num- bers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential or ultra, wide, singleâended devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. SCSI Bus Differences
C-4 T able Câ1. SCSI Bus Differ ences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable Narrow , Single- Ended up to 8 bits 8 6.0 meters internal and embedded up to 5 Mbytes per second (19.6 feet) external Fast, Wide Dif- ferential up to 16 bits 16 25 meters internal and embedded up to 20 Mbytes per second (82 feet) external Ultra, Wide SingleâEnded** up to 40 Mbytes per second 16 bits 16 3.0 meters (9.84 feet) internal and external embedded * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on both buses. ** Only 2 external devices allowed (total of 4 devices).
C-5 T able Câ2. SCSI Bus Addr esses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SCSIâ2 Address Priority SCSIâ2 ID Number 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8âbit devices SCSIâ2 SingleâEnded 16âbit SCSIâ3 Fast, W ide or Ultra, devices 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 W ideâSE Bus
C-6 This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your work- station in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for narrow single-ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally con- nected devices to the system fast, wide differential port: ⢠C291 1A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally con- nected devices to the system ultra, wideâSE port: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠CXXXXA (p/n 5183â3710â.9) cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP de- SCSI Restrictions
C-7 vices. Use of other cables can result in signifi- cant problems with system operation. Narrow singled-ended SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). Fast, wide differential SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). Ultra, wideâSE SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your configuration. If you are daisy-chaining narrow single-ended SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining fast, wide differential SCSI devices togeth- er , use the following cables: ⢠C291 1A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wideâSE SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length NOTICE: See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
C-8 Connectors and T erminator Any narrow , single-ended SCSI device connecting to the system box must use a 50-pin high-density thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the system board, and a 50-pin low-density bail lock connector on the other end. If you attach a second SCSI device, the cable must have low-density connectors on each end. Any fast, wide differential or ultra, wideâSE SCSI device connecting to the system box must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw con- nector on both ends. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order terminator K2291 (for 50-pin connectors) or C2905A (for 68-pin fast, wide dif- ferential connectors) or C2972A (for 68-pin ultra, wideâSE connec- tors) from Hewlett-Packard. SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to a certain number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the additional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own configuration constraints: ⢠narrow , single-ended SCSI bus ⢠fast-wide, differential SCSI bus (J282 or J2240 upgrade) ⢠ultra, wideâsingleâended, SCSI bus (J2240 only) Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape de-
C-9 vices per system. T able Câ3 shows configuration constraints for each narrow , single-ended SCSI device type. If the system has internal hard disk drives or a floppy disk drive, you must count them as SCSI devices. T able Câ3. Narr ow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (internal and external) Floppy Disk Drives CD-ROM Drives 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 9-track T ape Drives 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) Maximum Number of SCSI Devices 7 1 1 2 2 1 1 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three SCSI-2 drive addresses. Each address must be accounted for in the maximum number of NSE SCSI devices allowed. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus.
C-10 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Fast, wide differential SCSI does not work with the narrow , single-en- ded SCSI. T able Câ4 shows the configuration constraints for each fast, wide differential SCSI device type. T able Câ4. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints External Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Devices SCSI-3 Drive (fast, wide disk drives only) 15 SCSI-3 Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7 Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed CAUTION: Do not mix narrow single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide SingleâEnded SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra, wideâSE SCSI does not work with the narrow , single-ended SCSI or FWD SCSI. T able Câ5 shows the configuration constraints for each ultra, wideâSE SCSI device type. T able Câ5. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints External Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Devices Ultra, W ideâSE Drive (ultra, wide disk drives only) 2 Ultra, W ideâSE Disk Arrays (addressed as a single drive) 1 Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus.
C-1 1 This section helps you to determine the total length of the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus, the fast, wide differential SCSI bus and the ultra, wideâSE SCSI bus. Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external SCSI devices, and SCSI interconnect cables) using T able Câ6: 1. Find all of your external NSE SCSI devices in the first column. In the third column, write the NSE SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your devices. NOTICE: In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2. In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the NSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 3. Add up all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the narrow , single-ended standard SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal Determining SCSI Bus Length
C-12 NSE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-13 T able Câ6. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Narr ow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length = NSE SCSI Device Cable Length meters (feet) meters (feet) System Unit 7980S A1999A 0.3 (1.0) C1701C C1704C Internal NSE SCSI Bus Length Device Internal Length Subtotals: meters (feet) External C1520A C1521A C1700C C1705C C2213A 0.0 (0.0) 0.3 (1.0) (T otal NSE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 6 meters [19.6 feet]) C2217T 1.7 (5.6) 1.7 (5.6) N/A 0.2 (0.7) 0.2 (0.7) 1.1 (3.6) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 1.5 (4.9) 1.3 (4.3)
C-14 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total FWD SCSI bus length for the FWD SCSI- bus on your system using T able Câ7: 1. List all of your internal FWD SCSI devices in the first column. 2. In the second column, write the lengths of the internal FWD SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3. In the third column, write down the lengths of the FWD SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the âSCSI Restric- tionsâ section.) 4. Add up all of the numbers in the second column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the third column. 5. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the FWD SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters (82 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-15 T able Câ7. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Bus T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length = FWD SCSI Device Internal FWD SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) C3034T C3035T C3036T meters (feet) Device Internal Length Cable Length meters (feet) External Subtotals: (T otal FWD SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) System Unit N/A 1.7 (5.6) 1.0 (3.3) 1.0 (3.3) 1.0 (3.3)
C-16 Ultra, WideâSE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total UWSE SCSI bus length for the UWSE SCSI bus on your system using T able Câ8: 1. List all of your internal UWSE SCSI devices in the first column. 2. In the second column, write the lengths of the internal UWSE SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3. In the third column, write down the lengths of the UWSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the âSCSI Restric- tionsâ section.) 4. Add up all of the numbers in the second column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the third column. 5. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the UWSE SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters (9.84 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-17 T able Câ8. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus T otal UWSE SCSI Bus Length = SCSI Device Internal SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) C6390A meters (feet) Device Internal Length Cable Length meters (feet) External Subtotals: (T otal SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) System Unit N/A 1.7 (5.6) 0.3 (1.0) 1.7 (5.6)
C-18 Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single- click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âf Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: Assigning SCSI Device IDs
C-19 Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ========================================================================== bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/12 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/12/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/12/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/12/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/12/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/12/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/12/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/12/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/12/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/12/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/12/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/12/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/12/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/12/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter graphics 0 10/0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics graphics 1 10/8 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 10/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 7 10/20/5/3.0.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 8 10/20/5/3.1.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 9 10/20/5/3.2.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor processor 1 34 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
C-20 4. Y ou can determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by look- ing under the H/W Path heading. The J2240 lists 8/4/19/0 as the built-in SCSI bus controller . For devices connected to the built- in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/4/19/0.6 .0 tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 6 on the SCSI bus. Narrow Single-Ended System SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ9: 1. W rite in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives in T able Câ9. 2. W rite in the type of external drives (single-ended standard, EISA, or fast, wide devices) currently connected to your system under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID Number .â 3. Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 4. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 4. Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the de- fault ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an exist-
C-21 ing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device except the system card.
C-22 T able Câ9. Narr ow , Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal External System SCSI Drive(s) Floppy Disk Drive (if present, uses ID No. 0) N/A N/A CDâROM Drive (if present, uses ID No. 2) N/A Internal System Drives: External Device Drives: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1st External Device 2nd External Device 3rd External Device 4th External Device 5th External Device 6th External Device 7th External Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 SCSI devices (internal and external) connected to the system. 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No. 1) 5. W rite in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives.
C-23 6. W rite in the type of external single-ended drives currently con- nected to your workstation under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDe- vice ID Number .â 7. Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 8. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI IDs, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 8. Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the de- fault ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an exist- ing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for infor- mation on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller .
C-24 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ10: 1. W rite in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, W ide Differential SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDe- vice ID Number .â 2. Add your new drive to the table. 3. Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide differential SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able Câ10. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Device IDs Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device 2nd Internal Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a FWD SCSI bus. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives 6 5
C-25 Ultra, WideâSE SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ1 1: 1. W rite in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra, W ide SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID Num- ber .â 2. Add your new drive to the table. 3. Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able Câ1 1. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Device IDs Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device 2nd Internal Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to an UWSE bus. 6 5 Ultra, W ide SingleâEnded Device Drives
C-26 This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (nar- row single-ended, ultra, wideâSE and fast,wide differential). System SCSI Port Connection The system contains two (2) SCSI connectors: ⢠System Single-Ended SCSI-2 Connector ⢠System Fast, W ide Differential or Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Con- nector Figure Câ1 shows the rear panel with terminators attached to the two SCSI connectors. Figure Câ2 shows the two SCSI connectors without terminators. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Connecting to the SCSI Ports
C-27 îîîî î îîîîîîîîîî Figur e Câ1. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors with T erminators Attached
C-28 Fast, Wide Differential or Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Connector SingleÄEnded SCSIÄ2 Connector Figur e Câ2. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without T erminators NOTICE: The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order terminator K2291 (NSE), C2905A (FWD), or C2972A (UWSE) from Hewlett- Packard.
D-1 Appendix D The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console in- terface and how to use them. It presents the information in the follow- ing sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
D-2 Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menuâdriven boot console interface that al- lows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot· ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available.
D-3 The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he , or ? and the menu or command you want help on. ââââââ Main Menuââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââ âââââââââââ BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/ commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/ comands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system Main Menu: Enter command > ââââââ
D-4 ââââââ Configuration Menuââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description ââââââââ âââââââââââ AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display bootârelated in formation BootTimer [0 â 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig Display or set LAN Configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current moni tor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu
D-5 ââââââ Configuration Menu: Enter command > ââââââ Information Menu âââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââââââ âââââââââââ ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display bootârelated information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display builtâin system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ââââââ Information Menu: Enter command >
D-6 ââââââ Service Menu âââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââ âââââââââââ ChassisCodes [<proc>] Display chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>} Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ââââââ Service Menu: Enter command >
D-7 Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system ad- ministrator . 1. Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HPâUX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before termi- nating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or other- wise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3. When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the bootconsole Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the fol- lowing messages: Processor is booting from first available de- vice.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds.
D-8 NOTICE: If you are using a powerâsaving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4. Press a key . Y ou will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
D-9 Booting Y our W orkstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HPâUX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operat- ing system that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDSâformat tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, specified in Mne- monic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDSâformat tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0
D-10 ⢠If you do not know which device you want to boot from, then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch Path Number Device Path Device Type âââââââââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââââ P0 FWSCSI.6.0 HP C2490WD P1 SESCSI.1.0 HP HP35480A Main Menu: Enter command > Boot P1 The operating system on the specified device is used to start your workstation (also see; Sear ching for Bootable Media ). ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) be- fore booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAcces- sing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with ISL (Y,N,Q)> Answering yes ( Y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the specified device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HPâUX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter N. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix ) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0 ) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev ), type the following at the ISL> prompt:
D-1 1 ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your file systems have boot- able operating systems, you can find them with the search IPL command.
D-12 Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠T o continue the display , press Ctrl Q . ⢠T o halt the search, press any other key These flowâcontrol commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch ipl device_type where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the builtâin fast, wide SCSI bus. sescsi is the builtâin singleâended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the builtâin LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
D-13 Resetting Y our W orkstation T o reset your workstation to its predefined values, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Configu- ration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Configuration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
D-14 Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able Dâ1. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speci- fied device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T able Dâ1. System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usual- ly a DDSâformat tape device) console or cone Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstatonâ s primary input ASCII device T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the follow- ing at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able Dâ2. T able Dâ2. Mnemonic Style Notation for Boot Paths I/O T ype Specification Format Builtâin FWSCSI core.fwscsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number slot n.fwscsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number Builtâin SCSI core.scsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number Builtâin LAN core.lan. server_addr ess.init_timeout.io_time- out
D-15 T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able Dâ1. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAcces- sing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able Dâ1 and path is the specification of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as de- scribed in T able Dâ2). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0
D-16 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a spe- cific resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s mon- itor with a different type of monitor , you must reconfigure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics configuration. This command is available in Configuration Menu of the boot console interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics configuration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the configuration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; Main Menu: Enter command > co Configuration: Enter command > mo The correct usage for setting the graphics configuration is: mo graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are:
D-17 graphics(0) through graphics(2) â Graphics adapters installed in op- tion slots 0 through 2 and type is the numerical monitor type. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 2 would be graphics(2A) and graphics(2B).
D-18 Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor configuration for your system from the Configuration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Configuration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and there monitor types configured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class âââââââââ ââââ ââââ ââââââ âââââââââââ ââââ âââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(1) 1 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the graphics adapter(located in slot 1) graph- ics(1) is configured. The monitor type for graphics(1) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 72 Hz.
D-19 Setting the Monitor T ype Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the following: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed: MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââââââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA
D-20 GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 72Hz Double buff ered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 ââââââââuser definedâââââââ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
D-21 T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the following: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class âââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your sys- tem. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n â nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card.
D-22 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâ s graphics parameters by using the monitor command before doing so, you need to perform the fol- lowing: W ait two seconds after the Num Lock light flashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selec- tion process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light flashes. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legibly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter: Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class âââââ âââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(1) 1 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to confirm your selection. Press Y to save this monitor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed:
D-23 To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 se- conds)... To restart the monitor selection process, press TAB. Changing the Console to External T erminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics de- vice, use the following procedure to display the console to an external terminal: 1. T urn system power off. 2. Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3. Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the left serial connector) on the system rear panel (PCI/EISA as- sembly). 4. Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
D-24 Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows: first, a memory configuration table with properlyâinstalled and configured memory (Sample Output 1); and second, output when a DIMM has been improperly installed (Sample Output 2). T o display the current memory configuration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and configuration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The first listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and configured memory modules. The second listing shows the in- formation for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed or configured.
D-25 Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are properly installed and configured: MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ââââ âââââââââ ââââââ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b 32MB Configured 2a/b 128MB Configured âââââââââ TOTAL 224MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot âââ âââââ âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââ ââââ 0x00000000 1 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0x0c000000 0 2 Configured 0 Configured 16MB 1a/b 2 Configured 2 Configured 16MB 1a/b Group 1 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 2 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE
D-26 SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââ ââââ 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 234881024 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) â 0 ââââââââââ Available Memory (bytes) : 234881024 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION ââââââââ ââââââââââ 0x0710 0x0900
D-27 Memory Information Sample 2 The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are not properly installed and configured. In this sample the memory module in memory slot 1A is missing. MEMORY INFORMATION WARNING: Memory has been reconfigured due to a physical change or because the Page Deallocation Table (PDT) was cleared. This is for information only. No action is re- quired. MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ââââ âââââââââ ââââââ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b ??MB SIMM not seated properly. 2a/b 128MB Configured âââââââââ TOTAL 192MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot âââ âââââ âââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââ 0x00000000 0 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 1 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE
D-28 SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââ ââââ 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 0 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 2 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) â 0 âââââââââââ Available Memory (bytes) : 201326592 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION ââââââââ ââââââââââ 0x0710 0x0900
D-29 Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all builtâin I/O devices and option- al I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the In- formation Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot con- sole interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the builtâin and optional I/O devices is displayed. I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ââââ ââââââââ ââââ ââââââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââ 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge builtâin 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O builtâin 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter builtâin 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel builtâin 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio builtâin 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 builtâin 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI builtâin 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN builtâin 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard builtâin 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse builtâin 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00
D-30 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy builtâin 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter builtâin 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port builtâin 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter builtâin 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 builtâin 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter builtâin 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter builtâin 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ââââ ââââ âââââââ 8/20/5/1 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/2 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/3 EISA slot is empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class ââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ
D-31 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto search are variables stored in your workstationâ s nonvolatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these flags to new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search flags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot con- sole user interface. The state of the auto search flag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto search is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot de- vice is not available. If auto search is off, your workstation will de- fault to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto sear ch flags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off .
D-32 Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Builtâin fast, wide SCSI devices Builtâin singleâended SCSI devices Builtâin LAN bootp servers NOTICE: Fast wide SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
D-33 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECure flag is a variable stored in nonâvolatile memory . (Nonâ volitalmemory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this flag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECure flag is set to on, autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regardless of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure flag , enter the follow- ing command: secure T o set the SECure flag on or off , enter one of the following: secure on secure off
D-34 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on ), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing during its powerâ on self tests. This enables your workstation to complete its boot pro- cess quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by per- forming a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off ), more extensive memory test- ing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, caus- ing the boot process to take longer . If you are experiencing difficulty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
D-35 Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your workstation to other users. For example, if your workstation is to be- come a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identifies the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the follow- ing at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelveâdigit number in hexadecimal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009â789abc The address is for the systemâ s builtâin LAN. Configure and Display LAN Settings (J2240 Only) The LanConfig command configures and displays the current LAN settings. The hardware system supports 10BaseâT , 100BaseâT and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex), operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u, (this is the default and recommended setting) type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx
D-36 T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTICE: The LAN setting defaults to LANâTP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LANâAUI setting. Also note that the new lan configura- tion settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command. Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revi- sion and speed, cache size, memory size, flag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Informa- tion Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
D-37 Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM in- formation for the specified fault type. T o display PIM information for a specific fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim pr ocessor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim â gives all fault types pim 0 â HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type â fault type information on processor
GL-1 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root directory (â/â) and ending with the filename it- self. See also file , filename , pathname . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access permissions . active window The window that is receiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active window , anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The active window is said to have the âkeyboard focus.â ANSI The American National Standards Institute, a nonâprofit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by national industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on.
GL-2 attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v . T o make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strictly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, capable of representing 2âcolor images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A service provided by a short program, stored in the readâonly memory of your workstation, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory . Part- ner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless workstations. See also boot ROM . boot console interface The interactive program that enables you to interact with the hard- ware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operating system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A readâonly memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and pro- ducing a standard display .
GL-3 bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental characterâcode unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CDâROM Compact Disc ReadâOnly Memory . See also CDâROM disc, CDâ ROM drive . CDâROM disc CDâROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, except that they store data. CDâROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits and flat spots ar- ranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CDâROM drive A randomâaccess, readâonly , massâstorage device that uses remov- able CDâROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically and an embedded controller with a SCSI inter- face. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory .
GL-4 click T o press and r elease a mouse button. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse buttons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server , performs as a fileâsystem server for the cluster clients. See also cluster client, cluster node, cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HPâUX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server . See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server , performs as a server to the cluster . See also cluster, cluster client, cluster server . cluster server A workstation that provides file access, login access, file transfer , printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , clus- ter client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command.
GL-5 command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HPâUX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell. command option Information you provide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the na- ture, number , and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically , the term configuration may refer to a hardware configu- ration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke combination used as a shorthand way of specifying com- mands. T o enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control key while pressing another key . cpu See Central Processing Unit . current dir ectory See current working dir ectory .
GL-6 current session The work and processes that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session . current working dir ectory The directory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory . cursor The small blinking box displayed in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE terminal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisyâchaining A method of connecting devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cassettes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automatic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window . Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. T o display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager button on the W ork- space, then click on Color .
GL-7 directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HPâUX organizational structure. Basically , it is a file that stores names and links to files and other directories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk, CDâROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation can use the disk of its partner workstation or other workstations. If necessary , it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other workstations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node, workstation .
GL-8 double click T o press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag T o press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CDâROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop T o release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your workstation characteristics, home directory , and default search paths. See also environment variables . environment variables The set of defined shell variables (some of which are P A TH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT , HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory , and default search paths. See also environment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based.
GL-9 Extended Industry Standard Architectur e (EISA) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their A T series computers. fast, wide SCSI A 16âbit wide bus with highâpower receivers and drivers, which al- lows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also singleâended standard SCSI, Small Computer System Interface . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory , file- name . file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directory . Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that determines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferences. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file , pathname . file server A workstation whose primary task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data.
GL-10 file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. floppy diskette A thin, recordâshaped plate that stores data on its magnetic surfaces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. Help Manager The HP VUE application that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable representing the home directory . This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. T ypically , this is /users/ login , where login is your username. See also home dir ec- tory .
GL-1 1 home directory A shorthand way of referring to a frequently used directory , almost always the login directory . host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol addr ess . HPâUX cluster See cluster node , cluster server . HP V isual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X W indow system), enabling you to control your workstation by direct- ly manipulating graphical objects instead of by typing commands at a commandâline prompt. HP VUE See HP V isual User Environment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âico- nizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. Whatever pro- cesses are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is iconized.
GL-12 iconify See iconize. iconize T o turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon . Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating sys- tem. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give informa- tion to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also output device . input window The window that displays a programâ s prompt and any commands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol addr ess (IP address) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a net- work. Also referred to as the IP address, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as âa.
GL-13 IP address See internet protocol addr ess . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code responsible for managing the computer â s resources. The kernel con- trols the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network. LAN station address See local area network station addr ess . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you specify a link as a pathname or part of a pathname, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v . T o join together two or more objects. local ar ea network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to communicate with each other . The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Ser- vices software.
GL-14 local ar ea network station address The label that uniquely identifies the local area network (LAN) con- nection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in T o initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This creates your first user process. See also username. login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory . See also home directory . Login Manager The program that controls the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the user â s username and password. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system. menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pullâdown or popâup menus for that application. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize.
GL-15 mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory , or link. A name can include various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character . See also pathname. network T wo or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster , workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver , the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and network media access. node A network computer (workstation). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with anoth- er node. See also disked workstation, diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster . See also cluster , node .
GL-16 nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after workstation power is turned off. object Any file, directory , or link in the network. See also directory , file, link , pathname . operating system The program that supervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HPâUX system, including the kernel and all HPâUX commands. See also kernel. option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output devices. See also input device . output window The window that displays a process response to your command. parent dir ectory A directory that contains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory . See also subdirectory .
GL-17 partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also disk- less workstation . password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occasionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user account . path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destina- tion object. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every directory name between the starting point and the des- tination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also referred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID .
GL-18 pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer ,â the pointer shows the mouse location on the screen. The pointer â s shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE W orkspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow . process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a program currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the oper- ating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HPâUX commands and routines consist of programs. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a realâlife push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory .
GL-19 ROM Readâonly memory . root See superuser . scr oll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a window that allows the user to view information that does not fit within the window . SCSI See Small Computer System Interface . server A program that controls all access to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A commandâline interpreter program used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HPâUX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key , and C shells. Sometimes referred to as a command interpreter . See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you give the system to execute a utility program or shell script. See also shell script , utility program .
GL-20 shell script A file that contains commands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multiâuser state to system ad- ministration state. SIMM See Single Inâline Memory Module . singleâended standard SCSI An 8âbit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, wide SCSI , Small Computer System Interface . Single Inâline Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar . The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfacing a computer to multiple, disparate highâspeed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CDâROM, singly or in combination. See also fast, wide SCSI, singleâended standard SCSI .
GL-21 standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster . See also cluster . Style Manager The HP VUE application that provides the ability to customize vari- ous aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior , and access to other workstations. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below , another directory . The directory above the subdirectory is called the parent directory . The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory . See also parent dir ectory . superuser A user with permission to enter the topâlevel directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. T o âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now assuming the role of system administrator . Y ou can do this either by logging into the system as root , or by typing su at a commandâline prompt. Y ou must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person responsible for system and network installation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel process by a user program.
GL-22 system name See internet protocol addr ess . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emulates a complete display terminal. T erminal windows are typically used to fool nonâclient programs into believing they are running in their fa- vorite terminal. When not running programs or executing operating system commands, terminal windows display the commandâline prompt. See also HP Visual User Envir onment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the window object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person au- thorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâ s pass- word. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Y our system administra- tor assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login proce- dure when the system displays the login prompt. See also user ac- count .
GL-23 username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The username is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software requiring secure entry . utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequent- ly required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a directory . See also command, shell command . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of windows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also W orkspace Man- ager . Window Manager The HP VUE program that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current working dir ectory . W orkspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic objects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP V isual User Environment , terminal window .
GL-24 W orkspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and operation of win- dows on the HP VUE W orkspace. The W orkspace Manager is a spe- cial W indow Manager . See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphicsâoriented computer having high speed and high memory capacity . A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a moni- tor , and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation .
Index-1 Index î î/î$ )î î 20 î/î$* ! î./, -î î4îî - î$!$îî.$*)-î î4îî î/î$* î*)) î.*,- # îî #*) - îîî î î4îî ($î,* #*) îîî î4îî î î**. î*)-*' $). ,!îî î î 4î î**.$)" .# -3-. (î !î$'/, î îîî -*'0$)" ,*î' (- î îîîîîî î$-î- îî, *!î î4î '*îî$)"î î4î5î4îî *0 ,0$ 1î î4î5î4î /)'*îî$)"î î4î5î4îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î4î î/-3 '$"#.î î4îî5î4îî î*).,*'- î)î ! î./, -î î4î5î4î $)-.î''$)" $) -3-. ( /)$.î î 4îî5î 4îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 4îî '*îî$)" î)î /)'*îî$)" î î$-îî î4î5î4îî (*/).$)" î)î /)(*/).$)" î î$-îî î4îî5î4îî * ,î.$)" î*).,*'- î)î ! î./, -î î4î *0 ,0$ 1î î4î5î4î .,*/î' -#**.$)"î î4îî 0 ,$!3$)" .# î*)!$"/,î.$*)î î4îî î'*-$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î î*((î)î- î $*î î4îîî î4îî î-.(î î4îî 2$.î î4îî !îîî&/ î î4îî !.$*î î4îî!. î î4îî $*-îî)î î4î ( î$î$)$.î î4î (.î î4îî ,î î î4îî ,'*"$)î î4îî .î,î î4îîî î4î . ') .î î4îî 0 ,$!3î î4îî î*)!$"/,$)" #î,î1î, î î 4î î#î)"$)" (*)$.*, .3 î î 4îî î'*-$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î $)-.î''$)" îîîîîî î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî îîî .î î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî îîî î *, ",î #$î- î*î,îî î 4îî5î 4îî !'* 3 î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî #î,î î$-& î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî (î-- -.*,î" î 0$î -î î 4îî 5î 4îî ( (*,3î î 4îî5î 4îî * )$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î î*)) î.*,-î -3-. ( /)$. îî *1 ,î î4îî î/î$* # îî #*) -îîîî î î4îî î/î$* ($î,* #*) îîîî î4îî
Index-2 keyboard, 1Ä14 mouse, 1Ä14 network, 1Ä15 parallel, 1Ä15 PS/2, 1Ä14 rear panel, 1Ä10Ä1Ä16 RS-232, 1Ä15 SCSI, 1Ä16 serial, 1Ä15 stereo line-IN, 1Ä12 stereo line-OUT , 1Ä12 controls, system unit front panel, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 power switch, 1Ä7 cpio command DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 floppy disk drive, 4Ä10 cstm command, 5Ä15 D DDS tape archiving data, 3Ä14 listing files, 3Ä17 restoring files, 3Ä15 transferring data, 3Ä14 writing to, 3Ä15 DDS tape drive, 3Ä1 cleaning the tape heads, 3Ä7Ä3Ä8 controls and indicators, 3Ä3Ä3Ä6 installing in system unit, B Ä18ÄB Ä21 loading and unloading a data cassette, 3Ä9Ä3Ä19 media interchangeability restrictions, 3Ä8, 3Ä18 media life, 3Ä7Ä3Ä8 overview, 3Ä3Ä3Ä6 troubleshooting, 3Ä18Ä3Ä19 using device files, 3Ä12 verifying the configuration, 3Ä10 DDS-2, data compression mode, switch settings, B Ä21 DDS-2 tape drive jumper settings, B Ä20 LED indicators, 3Ä6Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä6 DDS-DC tape drive jumper settings, B Ä19 LED indicators, 3Ä4Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä4 DDS-format tape, write-protect tab, 3Ä8 DDS-format tape drive, write-protecting a data cassette, 3Ä8 description of system. îîî system description device files overview CD-ROM drive, 2Ä14 DDS tape drive compressed mode, 3Ä14 noncompressed mode, 3Ä12 floppy disk drive, 4Ä6 documentation conventions, xvii E electronic mail. îîî networking, mail electrostatic discharge precautions, AÄ 5 emissions regulations, AÄ3 exit command, SupportW ave, 5Ä17 F fbackup command, DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 File T ransfer Protocol. îîî ftp command
Index-3 !'* 2 î$-& î,$0 î î3î î*)!$"/,$)" .# !'* 2 î,$0 ,î î3îî !*,(î..$)" î î$-& .. î î3î4î3îî $)- ,.$)" î)î , (*0$)" î î$-& .. î î3î .,*/î' -#**.$)"î î3îî /-$)" î 0$î !$' -î î3î 0 ,$!2$)" .# î*)!$"/,î.$*)î î3î4î3îî 1,$. î ,*. î.$)" î î$-& .. î î3î4î3î !'* 2 î$-& .. î,î#$0$)" îî.îî î3î4î3îî !*,(î..$)"î î3î4î3îî '$-.$)" !$' -î î3îî , -.*,$)" !$' - .* -2-. (î î3î4î3îî -î0$)" !$' -î î3î .,î)-! ,,$)" îî.îî î3î4î3îî 1,$. î ,*. î. .îîî î3î4î3î !'* 2 î,$0 $)-.î''$)" $) -2-. ( /)$.î î 3îî4î 3îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 3îî . ,($)î.*,-î î 3îî !.$* î*((î)îî îîîî!*,(î. .î î,$0 î î3îî !. î*((î)îî î3îî H #î,î î,$0 îîî$)"î î 3îî4î 3îî î..îî#$)" (*/).$)" î,îî& .î î 3îî î*)!$"/,$)"î î 3îî $)-.î''$)" $) -2-. ( /)$.î î 3îî4î 3îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 3îî #î,î1î, î*)!$"/,î.$*)î îîî î*)!$"/,$)" #î,î1î, I $( *,.î). $)!*,(î.$*)î î3îî 4î3îî $)î$îî.*,- îîîî -2-. ( /)$.î î3î îîî îîîîîî î,$0 î î3îî4î3îî îîîîî .î î,$0 î î3î4î3î îîîîîî .î î,$0 î î3î4î3î , (*0îî' î 0$î î î3î -2-. ( /)$.î î3î $)-.î''$)" #î,î1î, îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îîîîî .î î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îîîîîî *, ",î #$î- î*î,îî î 3îî4î 3îî!'* 2 î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îî#î,î î$-& î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îî(î-- -.*,î" î 0$î -î î 3îî 4î 3îî $).,*î/î.$*)î îîî -2-. ( *0 ,0$ 1 $*-îî) î*((î)îî !'* 2 î$-& î,$0 î î3î îî îîî, -- $)!*,(î.$*)î î3îî J %/( ,-î îîîî îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî îîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî !'* 2 î,$0 î î 3îî K & 2î*î,î î*)) î.*,î î3îî L îîîîî îîî î3îî
Index-4 laser safety statements, A Ä6ÄAÄ7 LCD, system unit, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 LED removable device, 1Ä8 system unit, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 LEDs CD-ROM drive, 2Ä19Ä2Ä20 DDS-2 tape drive, 3Ä6Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä6 DDS-DC tape drive, 3Ä4Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä4 logging in, from a remote terminal. îîî rlogin command M mail, 1Ä22 media interchangeability restrictions, DDS tape drive, 3Ä8 mediainit command, floppy diskette, 4Ä8 memory configuration, B Ä38ÄB Ä45 memory failures, 5Ä11Ä5Ä17 memory SIMM, sequence, B Ä42 monitor changing type, boot console interface, B Ä64 setting the type, at power on, B Ä64 monitors, 1Ä17 mounting a CD-ROM disc, 2Ä15Ä2Ä17 mouse, general information, 1Ä18 mouse connector, 1Ä14 mt command, DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 N network connectors, 1Ä15 Network File System (NFS), 1Ä23 networking overview, 1Ä22Ä1Ä23 ftp command, 1Ä23 mail, 1Ä22 Network File System (NFS), 1Ä23 rcp command, 1Ä23 rlogin command, 1Ä22 telnet command, 1Ä22 O on-line help cpio command, 3Ä18, 4Ä10 cstm command, 5Ä15 fbackup command, 3Ä18 floppy information, 4Ä11 ftio command, 3Ä18 ftp command, 1Ä23 mediainit command, 4Ä11 mt command, 3Ä18 rcp command, 1Ä23 rlogin command, 1Ä22 tar command, 3Ä18, 4Ä10 telnet command, 1Ä22 opening the system unit, B Ä6ÄB Ä7 operating system overview, 1Ä19Ä1Ä23 ordering information DDS-format tape cassettes, 3Ä19 floppy diskettes, 4Ä12 P parallel connector, 1Ä15 pointing devices, general information, 1Ä18
Index-5 *)1î, î)((îî.),î î4îî *)1î, -1#.î"î -3-.î' /(#.î î4î5î4î *,)î&î'-î îîî -)&0#(! *,)î&î'- *,)î/î. îî-î,#*.#)(î îîî -3-.î' îî-î,#*.#)( îîî î î)((îî.),-î î4îî Q /î-.#)(-î -/!!î-.#)(-î ), *,)î&î'-î 20### R ,î* î)''î(îî î4îî ,î&îî-î î)î/'î(.-î 20 ,î').î&3 î)*3 #&î-î îîî ,î* î)''î(î ,î')0îî&î î,#0î-î î..îî"#(! ')/(.#(! î,îî%î.î î 4îî ,î')0îî&î 'îî#î îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîî .î*î î,#0îî î 4îî &)**3 î,#0îî î 4îî ,î0#-#)( "#-.),3î 20# ,&)!#( î)''î(îî î4îî îîîîîî î)((îî.),î î4îî *#()/.î î4îî S -î î.3 î(î ,î!/&î.),3 -.î.î'î(.-î 20î î4 î î îî /.#&#.3 îîî#(! î "î,î î,#0îî î 4îî5î 4îî î)( #!/,#(! ."î &)**3 î,#0î,î î4îî ')/(.#(! î îîîîîî î#-îî î4îî5î4îî /(')/(.#(! î îîîîîî î#-îî î4îî5î4îî îîîî î--#!(#(! îî0#îî îî- î-.î 1#îîî î4îî5î4îî -#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4îî5î4îî î/- &î(!." î-.î 1#îî î# î,î(.#î&î î4îîî î4îî-#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4îî îîî&î-î î4î î)( #!/,î.#)( î)(-.,î#(.-î î4î î-.î 1#îî î# î,î(.#î&î î4îî î)((îî.#)(-î î4î î)((îî.),- î(î .î,'#(î.),î î4î îî0#îî îî-î î4îî5î4îî *),. î)((îî.#)(-î î4îî ,î-.,#î.#)(-î î4î5î4îî îîîî î/-î î# î,î(îî-î î4î5î4î îîîî î)((îî.),-î î4îî îîîî îî-î $/'*î,- îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî &)**3 î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîîî î/- &î(!."î î4îî î)( #!/,î.#)( î)(-.,î#(.-î -#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4î îî.î,'#(#(! î/- &î(!."î î4îî5î4îî -î,#î& î)((îî.),î î4îî *#()/.î î4îî -)&0#(! *,)î&î'-î î4î î)). î#&/,îî î4îî #(î#îî.îî î3 ."î îîîî î4îî5î4îî 'î'),3 î#&/,î-î î4îî5î4îî *,)î&î'- î(î -)&/.#)(-î î4î5î4î
Index-6 î&&* îî!# (îî î/î îîîîîî î(!,îî î/î îîî *î'î î(!,îî î/î î#&''. î!)" î(!,îî î/î î(î î!)" î(!,îî î/î #&îî!%î î%î î&&*!%î * î îîî î/î %î*-&("î î/î '&-î(!%î 'î î/î ).)*î$ ,î(!î!îî*!&% *î)*)î î/î î0î/î î î ''&(* î &&#) îî%îîî(î î/î î0î/î î ) î%î*-&(" $î)" !%î&($î*!&%î î /îî î ''&(* î &&#) îî%îîî(î î/î î0î/î î )-!*î î)î '&-î(î î /î ).)*î$ îî$!%!)*(î*!&% $î%îîî(îîî!%î î î(î î(!,îî î /îî0î /îîî&%î!î (!%î * î î#&''. î(!,î(î î/î î$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î %$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î ).)*î$ îî)î(!'*!&%î î /î0î /î ).)*î$ &,î(,!î-î î /î ).)*î$ %!*î&%%îî*&()î î /î î0î /î îî&%*(&#)î î /î0î /îîîîî î /î0î /îîîîî î /î0î /î'&-î( )-!*î î î /î0î /î ).)*î$ ,î(!î!îî*!&% *î)*)î î/î î0î/î î T *î( î&$$î%î îîîîî&($î* *î'î î(!,îî î/î î î#&''. î!)"î**îî î/î *î#%î* î&$$î%îî î /îî *(& î#î) &&*!%î See also )&#,!%î '(&î#î$) îîîîîî î(!,îî î/îî îîî *î'î î(!,îî î/î î0î/î î î#&''. î!)" î(!,îî î/î î U %$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î V ,î(!î. î&$$î%îî î/î î W -î(%!%î î%î îî *!&% )*î*î$î%*)î î /î
 Hewlett-Packard Co. 1997 First Printing: December 1997 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. NOTICE The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETTâP ACKARD W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT HP PRODUCT DURA TION OF W ARRANTY J282/J2240 one year 1. HP warrants HP hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or likeânew . 2. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. 3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. 4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. 5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP . If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery , warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery . 6. W arranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, inter facing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP , (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. 7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE ABOVE W ARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER W ARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALL Y DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY , SA TISF ACTOR Y QUALITY , AND FITNESS FOR A P AR TICULAR PURPOSE. 8. HP will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for t he product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective HP product. 9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LA W , THE REMEDIES IN THIS W ARRANTY ST A TEMENT ARE CUSTOMERâS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICA TED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DA T A OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DA T A), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, T ORT , OR OTHERWISE. FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE W ARRANTY TERMS CONT AINED IN THIS ST A TEMENT, EXCEPT T O THE EXTENT LA WFULL Y PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDA TOR Y ST A TUTOR Y RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company . RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in T echnical Data and Computer Software Clause at DF ARS 252.227.7013. Hewlett-Packard Co., 3000 Hanover St., Palo Alto, CA 94304. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
iii Contents System Overview Product Description 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Unit Front Panel Controls, LED, and LCD 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . System LCD 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Switch 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power LED 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removable Device Buttons and LEDs 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Connectors 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Connector 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP Parallel I/O Connector 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802.3 Network Connectors 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS-232C Serial Input/Output Connector 1-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Connectors 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cord Connector 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitors 1-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointing Devices 1-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System Overview 1-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Information Y ou Need to Note 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANIC ID 1-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information 1-21 . . . . . . . . . . . Networking Overview 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mail 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . telnet 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rlogin 1-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preface Chapter 1
iv ftp 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rcp 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFS 1-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our CDâROM Drive CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descriptions 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Drive 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Features 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Media 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caring for CD-ROM Discs 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the CD-ROM Drive 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM Disc 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a CD-ROM Disc 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloading a CD-ROM Disc 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation 2â1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 2â14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM 2-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading the Busy Light 2-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 2-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our DDS T ape Drive DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDS Drive 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls and Indicators 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs â DDS-DC Drive 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED W arning Conditions â DDS-DC Drive 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs â DDS-2 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Cassettes 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Life 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the T ape Heads 3-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Restrictions 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . Operating the DDS T ape Drive 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Chapter 3
v V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation 3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archiving Data in Compressed and Noncompressed Mode 3-14 . W riting to a Data Cassette 3-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System 3-15 . . . . . . Listing the Files on a Data Cassette 3-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Command Information 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Interchangeability Restrictions 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 3-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information 3-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Y our 3.5âInch Floppy Drive Using the Floppy Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting and Removing a Diskette 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the Floppy Drive 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V erifying the Floppy Drive Configuration 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Device Files 4-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting a New Diskette 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette 4-8 . . . . . . . . . Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System 4â9 . Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For More Information 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Floppy Driver 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T roubleshooting 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Information 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solving Problems Common Problems and Solutions 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dealing with a Boot Failure 5-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Failures 5â1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD-Indicated Problems 5â12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running System V erification T ests 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Chapter 5
vi Safety and Regulatory Statements Declaration of Conformity A-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC) A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Regulations A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCCI Class 2 ITE A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Regulations Compliance A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datacom Users Statement (United Kingdom Only) A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines â3. GSGV A-4 . Acoustics A-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC 825 Class 1 Laser Label A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W arnings and Cautions A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardware Configuration Checking the SCSI IDs B-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the System Unit B-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the System Unit B-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Removable Media Devices B-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD-ROM Drive B-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDS T ape Drive B-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floppy Drive B-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Hard Drive B-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a Hard Disk Drive B-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Hard Drive B-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Additional Memory B-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Processor Module B-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing an EISA, PCI, or Graphics Board B-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Y our Monitor T ype B-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface B-64 . Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On B-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A Appendix B
vii SCSI Connections SCSI Bus Differences C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSIRestrictions C-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cables C-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors and T erminator C-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Configuration Constraints C-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow SE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-8 . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . Determining SCSI Bus Length C-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow SE SCSI Bus Length C-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Length C-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Length C-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning SCSIDevice IDs C-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrow Single-Ended System SCSI Device IDs C-20 . . . . . . . . . Fast, W ide SCSI IDs C-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI IDs C-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting to the SCSI Ports C-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System SCSI Port Connection C-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Boot Console Interface î'' î'&*'$î î& î)îîîî îîî ,)î* î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîî**"& !î î'' î'&*'$î î& î)îîîî î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î'' "& î ',) î ')#* î "'& î /î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîî)î!"& î') î'' îî$î îîî"î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î î*î "& î ',) î ')#* î "'& î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& î&î îî "& î î !* î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& î&î îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î/îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î!î î'&" ') î'%%î&î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î,))î& î'&" ') î'&î" ,)î "'& î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î'&" ') î .(î î î'-î) î& î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î,))î& îî%'). î'&î" ,)î "'& î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î"*($î."& !î î î ,* 'î !î î.* î% îîî î /î î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî "& !î î , ' î'' î&î î, ' îîî)î! î$î * î /îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Appendix C Appendix D
viii îî îîî#îîî îîî îî!!îîî !îî îîî"îî!# îîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî îîî îî!!îîî !îî î î !îîî! îîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî !îî îîî î!î!îîî îîîîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî î# !îî îîîîîîî!îîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îî îîî#îîî îîî îîîîîîî!îîî î $îî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Glossary Index
ix 1â1. System Unit Front Panel Controls 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2. LCD Symbols 1-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â3. System Unit with Removable Device Door Open 1-9 . . . . . . . . 1â4. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors 1-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5. Audio Connectors 1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Controls and Features 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3. Placing the CD-ROM Disc in the Disc T ray 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4. Disc T ray Closed 2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6. Removing the CD-ROM Disc From the Disc T ray 2-10 . . . . . . 2â7. Disc T ray Closed 2-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1. DDS Drive Controls and Indicators 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2. Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a DDS T ape 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . 3â3. Loading a Data Cassette 3-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1. Setting the W rite-Protect T ab on a Floppy Diskette 4-3 . . . . . . . 4â2. Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 4-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1. Removing the Front Panel B-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ2. Replacing the Front Panel B-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ3. Removing Storage Drawer from System Unit B-1 1 . . . . . . . . . Bâ4. Removing F AN from EMI Plate B-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ5. Removing F AN screws B-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ6. Removing F AN/EMI plate B-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ7. Removing drive screws B-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ8 CD-ROM Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-17 . . . . . . . Bâ9 DDS-DC T ape Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-19 . . . Bâ10 DDS-2 T ape Drive and SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-20 . Bâ1 1. Switch Settings for Data Compression Operation Mode B-21 . Bâ12. Floppy Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings B-23 . . . . . . . . . Bâ13. Floppy Drive T erminators B-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ14. Attaching Removable Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation B-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figures
x Bâ15. Replacing Drive Screws B-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ16. Replacing the Storage Drawer Assembly B-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ17. Fast, Wide Hard Drive Jumper Settings B-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ18. Replacing Hard Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation B-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ19. Removing Storage Drawer from System Unit B-33 . . . . . . . . . Bâ20. Placing Hard Drives in Storage Drawer B-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ21. Removing the CPU Assembly B-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ22. Memory Retention Bracket and Memory DIMM Location B-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ23. CPU Assembly Orientation B-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ24. Memory DIMM Sequence B-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ25. Installing Memory Cards B-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ26. Replacing the CPU Assembly B-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ27. Removing the CPU Assembly B-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ28. CPU Shroud Location J282/2240 B-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ29. J282/2240 Processor Modules B-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ30. Replacing the CPU Assembly B-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ31. EISA/PCI/GSC Slots from Outside the EISA/PCI Assembly B-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ32. EISA/GSC Slots from Inside the J282 EISA Assembly B-52 . Bâ33. GSC/PCI/EISA Slots from inside the J2240 PCI Assembly B-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ34. Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly B-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ35. PCI/EISA I/O Assembly Bâ55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ36 Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly for Installation B-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ37. Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly Cover B-57 . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ38. Removing the PCI/EISA Slot Cover B-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ39. Installing a PCI, EISA or Graphics Board in the EISA Assembly B-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ40. Remove Block from PCI Assembly Cover B-60 . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ41. Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly Cover B-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ42. Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly Back B-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ43. Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly B-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors with T erminators Attached C-27 Câ2. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without T erminators C-28 . . . . .
xi 1â1. Audio Electrical Specifications 1-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2. Serial I/O Pins 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Operating Controls and Features 2-4 . . . . . . . . 3â1. LED Display Codes â DDS-DC Drive 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2. LED Display Codes â DDS-2 Drive 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â1. Problems Powering Up the System 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2. Problems Loading and Booting the Operating System 5-4 . . . . 5â3. Problems with the 802.3 Network 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â4. Problems Using a Hard Disk Drive 5-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â5. Problems Using the CD-ROM Drive 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6. Problems Using the DDS T ape Drive 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7. Problems Using the Floppy Disk Drive 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1. SCSI Bus Differences C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ2. SCSI Bus Addresses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities C-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ3. Narrow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-9 Câ4. Fast, W ide SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . Câ5. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints C-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ6. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus C-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ7. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Fast, W ide SCSI Bus C-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ8. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus C-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ9. Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs C-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ10. Fast, Wide SCSI Device IDs C-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Câ1 1. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Device IDs C-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dâ1. System Paths D-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dâ2. Mnemonic Style Notation D-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T ables
xii
xiii Pr eface
xiv This owner â s guide describes how to use your HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation. This manual assumes that you have installed your workstation as described in the J Class Har dwar e Installation Guide.
xv This guide is intended for HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation users. See Appendix A in the back of this manual for safety and regulatory statements that apply to this workstation. Please refer to the Release Document(s) you received with your sys- tem or system software for additional information that we may not have been able to include in this guide at the time of its publication. Audience Safety and Regulatory Statements Release Document(s)
xvi If you are using HP-UX version 10.20, refer to the following manuals for more information: ⢠J Class Har dwar e Installation Guide (A2876â90010) ⢠Using Y our HP W orkstation (A2615â90003) ⢠Installing and Updating HP-UX (B2355â90050) ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355â90051) ⢠Configuring HP-UX for Peripherals (B2355â90053) ⢠HP V isual User Environment Userâ s Guide (B1 171â90079) ⢠Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX File System (B2355â90038) T o order manuals, please contact your local sales office. The revision history for each edition of the manual is listed below: HP Part No. Edition Revision History A4081â90601 E0195 First printing A4081â90607 E0695 Second printing A4476â90013 E0596 Third printing A2876â90013 E1 196 Fourth printing A2876â90014 E0597 Fifth printing A2876â90015 E1297 Latest printing Revision History
xvii Unless otherwise noted in the text, this guide uses the following sym- bolic conventions. literal values Bold words or characters in formats and command de- scriptions represent commands or key words that you must use literally . Pathnames are also in bold. user -supplied Italic words or characters in formats and command values descriptions represent values that you must supply . sample user In examples, information that the user enters appears input in color . output Information that the system displays appears in this typeface . Enter A colored rectangle with rounded corners and a key label denotes a key on your keyboard. (In this manual we refer to the Enter key . On your keyboard the key may be labeled either Enter or Return.) Screen Button This colored symbol with a label in it denotes an HP VUE screen button. A screen button is a key or button which is drawn on your workstationâ s graphic display by HP VUE. It works like a keyboard key , except that you must move the mouse cursor over it and press the left mouse button to activate it. The screen buttonâ s la- bel describes its function. This symbol indicates a notice. This symbol indicates a procedure. This symbol indicates a caution. This symbol indicates the end of a chapter or a part of this guide. Documentation Conventions
xviii If you have any questions, suggestions, or problems with our hard- ware, software, or documentation, please call 1â800â633â3600 (US & Canada) or contact the HP Response Center for your country . Questions, Suggestions, or Problems
1-1 Chapter 1 System Overview ⢠Product description ⢠System unit front panel controls, LED, and LCD ⢠System unit rear panel connectors ⢠Monitors ⢠Keyboard and Mouse ⢠Pointing devices ⢠Operating system overview ⢠Important information you need to note ⢠Networking overview
1-2 This chapter introduces the HP 9000 J282/2240 workstations. Its pur- pose is to familiarize you with your workstation and its controls and indicators. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface.
1-3 This workstation has the following key features: ⢠Operating System HP-UX version 10.20 or later (J2240 requires HPâUX 10.20 ACE (Feb 1998) plus J2240 Hardware Extensions software) ⢠User Interface HP VUE version 3.0 graphical user interface or HP CDE ⢠Compatibility Source and binary code compatible with the Series 700 product family ⢠Monitors 20-inch 1280x1024 color monitor ⢠Optional Graphics HP VISUALIZEâEG, 8âplane 2D graphics HP VISUALIZEâ48XP , 48âplane graphics HP VISUALIZEâ8/24, Accelerated 8âplane or 24âplane 3D graphics HP VISUALIZEâFX2 (J2240 only) HP VISUALIZEâFX4 (J2240 only) HP VISUALIZEâFX6 (J2240 only) ⢠Main Memory 32 MB to 2 GB (J282) 32 MB to 3.3 GB (J2240 only) 32 MB to 4 GB (J2240, running HPâUX 1 1.x only) Product Description
1-4 ⢠Internal Storage Devices Fast, W ide Differential SCSI (J282/upgrade J2240 only) hard disk drives up to two: 2 or 4 GB Drives Ultra W ideâSE SCSI hard disk drives up to two (J2240 Only): 4 or 9 GB Drives Single-Ended SCSI removable Media â up to two: CD-ROM Drive 2.0â8.0 GB, 4-mm DDS tape drive Floppy drive ⢠Standard Network Ethernet IEEE 802.3 AUI Thicknet or RJ45, UTP T wisted Pair 10 BaseT/100 BaseT (J2240 Only) ⢠Standard I/O One Narrow Single-Ended SCSI: 8-bit (for removable devices) 5 MB/sec synchronous 1.5 MB/sec asynchronous AL T -1, 50-pin, high density SCSI-2 connector One Fast, W ide Differential SCSI: (for hard disk drives, J282/upgrade J2240 only) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high-density SCSI-3 P connector One Ultra, W ide SingleâEnded SCSI: (for hard disk drives, J2240 only) 20 MB/sec synchronous 68-pin, high-density SCSI-3 P connector T wo serial interfaces RS-232C, 9-pin male
1-5 One parallel interface Centronics, BUSY handshake 25-pin female ⢠EISA/GSC/PCI Five slots total; J282: four EISA and three GSC that can be used as follows: two individual EISA, one individual GSC, and two combination EISA or GSC. J2240: one EISA (optional), three 32âbit PCI, two 64âbit PCI, and three GSC that can be used as follows: one 32âbit PCI, one EISA or 32âbit PCI, one GSC or 32âbit PCI and two GSC or 64âbit PCI. ⢠Keyboard PS/2 Keyboard ⢠Mouse PS/2 Mouse
1-6 Before powering on your system, you should become familiar with the system unit controls. Figure 1â1 shows the the system unit front panel controls. îîîîîî î îî îîîîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîî î îî Figur e 1â1. System Unit Front Panel Contr ols System Unit Front Panel Controls, LED, and LCD
1-7 System LCD The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is located on the left side of the front panel. It displays messages about the state of the system, includ- ing error codes. The following symbols appear in the LCD, represent- ing the different system activities shown: Operating system running Disk Access in progress Network Receive in progress Network T ransmit in progress Figur e 1â2. LCD Symbols System Power Switch Use the Power switch to power the system unit on and off. CAUTION: Do not turn off the power to your workstation without first performing the recommended shutdown procedure. If you do not shut down your workstation properly , you can damage the programs and data on your disk. Using the proper shutdown method for your workstation and operating system also ensures that your system produces the proper diagnostic and self test messages, and broadcasts a warn- ing message to remote terminals that it is about to shutdown.
1-8 Follow the instructions in Using Y our HP W orkstation to shut down your workstation. System Power LED The Power Light Emitting Diode (LED) is located on the left side of the front panel. It lights when the system unit power is on and flashes until the OS is booted. Once the OS is booted, the LED remains on without flashing. Removable Device Buttons and LEDs Depending on your configuration, you can have up to two (2) of the following removable device drives: ⢠CD-ROM disc drive ⢠DDS tape drive ⢠Floppy diskette drive NOTICE: Y ou cannot have two of the same type of de- vice. For example, you can have a CD-ROM device and a floppy device, but not two CD- ROMs. A description of each driveâ s controls and indicators is in the chapter describing that device, later in this book. Figure 1â3 shows the system unit with the removable device door open. A removable device is in the top bay; a blank covers the empty bottom bay .
1-9 Removable Device Bays (2) Figur e 1â3. System Unit with Removable Device Door Open
1-10 This section describes the following connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel: ⢠Audio connectors (including headphones and microphone) ⢠PS/2 keyboard and mouse connectors ⢠HP parallel Centronics I/O connector ⢠802.3 AUI LAN connector ⢠802.3 TP (T wisted Pair) LAN connector ⢠RS-232C serial I/O connectors ⢠SCSI connectors including fast, wide differential, or ultra, wideâSE (J2240 only) and narrow single-ended SCSI ⢠TOC button ⢠Power cord connector ⢠HPâHIL connector (J282 only) NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that all cables are fully seated and properly fastened. Figure 1â4 shows the locations of the connectors on the system unitâ s rear panel. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
1-1 1 TOC Button (not shown) Fast, Wide DifferenÄ tial, or Ultra, Wide- SE SCSI Connector* Narrow , SE SC SI Connector* Keyboard Connector AUI LAN Connector T wisted Pair Connector (labeled UTP) RSÄ232C Connectors Graphics Connector Power Connector P arallel I/O Connector *SCSI Connectors are shown with terminators attached, as they are shipped from the factory . **See Figure 1-5 for detail on Audio Connectors. Mouse Connector Audio Connectors** HP-HIL Connector (J282 only) Figur e 1â4. System Unit Rear Panel Connectors
1-12 The symbols shown to the left of the connector descriptions in the following text, such as the headphone and microphone for audio connectors, are the same symbols used on the rear panel of the J282/2240 workstation. Audio Connectors Y our workstation has audio input and output capability through exter- nal input and output connectors on the rear panel and through an in- ternal speaker . The rear panel contains the Audio IN (stereo line-in), Mic (microphone-in), Audio OUT (stereo line-out), and Headphones (headphones-out) connectors. Audio OUT Connector Headphones OUT Connector Audio IN Connector Mic IN Connector Figur e 1â5. Audio Connectors The audio connectors are standard stereo audio mini-jacks. Hewlett- Packard recommends using gold-plated plugs available through audio retailers for best quality recording and playback through the external connectors. A summary of the workstation audio features follows.
1-13 ⢠Audio Features Programmable sample rates: 8kHz, 16kHz, 32kHz, 48kHz, 1 1.025kHz, 22.05kHz, and 44.1kHz. Programmable output attenuation: 0 to â96dB in â1.5dB steps Programmable input gain: 0 to 22.5dB in 1.5dB steps Input monitoring: 16-bit linear , 8-bit u-law , or A-law coding ⢠Audio Inputs Line-in Mono microphone compatible with 1.5V phantom supply (bias voltage supplied by the system) CD-ROM audio (if internal CDâROM is installed) ⢠Audio Outputs Line-out Headphone Mono speaker jacks Built-in mono speaker ⢠Audio CODEC Crystal CS4215
1-14 T able 1â1 summarizes the audio electrical specifications for this workstation. T able 1â1. Audio Electrical Specifications Frequency Response 25â20,000Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance Line in 2.0Vpk/47kohm Microphone 22mVpk/1kohm Line Out 2.8Vpp/47kohm Headphone 2.75Vpp/50ohm Speaker (internal) 5.88Vpp/48ohm Max Output Level/Impedance Output Impedance Line Out Headphone Speaker Line In Microphone Line Out Headphone Speaker Line In Microphone Line Out Headphone 619ohm 1 18ohm Signal to Noise 65dB 61dB 63dB 61dB 57dB THD (w/nominal load) â73dB â70dB â68dB â75dB â73dB T o convert from dB to number of significant bits, use the formula: n = dB 20 log 10 dB 6 . For example, for 61dB S/N then n= 61/6 significant bits, or in other words, about 6 bits of noise. ~ ~ 10 î î î î Keyboard Connectors PS/2 Keyboar d Connectors The PS/2 connectors provide an interface for the keyboard and mouse to the system. Consult the documentation that accompanies each input device for specific information concerning its use.
1-15 HP Parallel I/O Connector The 25-pin HP Parallel I/O interface uses Centronics interface proto- cols to support peripheral devices such as printers and plotters. Con- sult the documentation that accompanies each peripheral device for specific information concerning its use. 802.3 Network Connectors Y our workstation has built-in ThickNet LAN AUI and TP (T wisted Pair) connectors for the 802.3 (ETHERNET) or 10 BaseT/100 BaseT (J2240 only) network. Connections to ThinLAN networks require an external transceiver . Y our workstation will automatically select the correct network setting. RS-232C Serial Input/Output Connector Y ou can attach a variety of pointing devices (such as a mouse or trackball), or peripheral devices to the RS-232C Serial Input/Output (SIO) ports on the J282/2240 workstation. Peripheral devices include printers, plotters, modems, and scanners. Consult the documentation that accompanies each pointing or peripheral device for specific in- formation concerning its use. The SIO ports are programmable. Y ou can set functions such as bit rate, character length, parity , and stop bits. The SIO Ports are used as an interface for serial asynchronous devices to the CPU. The ports operate at up to a 19.2 K baud rate. T able 1â2 shows the SIO connector pin listings. The serial connectors are 9-pin D-sub connectors. Signal names are those specified in the EIA RS-232 standard.
1-16 T able 1â2. Serial I/O Pins Pin No. Signal 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Request T o Send DCD RXD TXD DTR GND RT S CTS Description Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Data Set Ready Clear T o Send Data T erminal Ready Ring Indicator T ransmit Data Ground 6 DSR 9R I SCSI Connectors Use the SCSI connectors to connect external SCSI devices such as DDS-format tape drives and CD-ROM drives. Consult the documen- tation that accompanies each SCSI device for specific information concerning its use. Refer to Appendix C for information about con- necting SCSI devices to your workstation. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. Power Cord Connector Plug the workstationâ s power cord into the power cord connector to provide ac power to the system.
1-17 Y ou can use one of the following HP monitors with your workstation: ⢠20-inch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4033A) ⢠20âinch, 1280x1024 color monitor (A4331A) ⢠21âinch, 1600x1200 color monitor (A4576A) Before using your monitor , you should become familiar with its con- trols, connectors, and indicators. For information on these controls and indicators and on using your monitor , see the documentation that came with it. Monitors
1-18 Y ou can use an HP three-button mouse (PS/2), a trackball, or other options as pointing devices with your workstation by using the serial ports. For instructions on using your particular pointing device, see the manual that came with it. For general information on using three-button mice and on the vari- ous cursor shapes associated with different areas of HP VUE while using a mouse, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . Pointing Devices
1-19 Y our workstation uses the HP-UX operating system, 10.20 or later (HPâUX 10.20 ACE (Feb 1998) plus J2240 Hardware Extensions software for J2240). Instant Ignition systems, (systems with preloaded software), have X-windows and Hewlett-Packardâ s graphical user in- terface, HP VUE version 3.0, or HP CDE installed and configured. Please refer to the âInstant Ignition System Configuration Informa- tionâ sheet that shipped with your system for details on configuration. If your Instant Ignition system does not have the kernel preconfigured with all of the device drivers you need, refer to the manual System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers to reconfigure your kernel. If you have any questions about Instant Ignition, refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for more information. Operating System Overview
1-20 Before you begin using your workstation, take a moment to gather the following important information and note it in the appropriate subsec- tion for future use: ⢠LANIC ID ⢠Internet Protocol (IP) address ⢠Subnetwork mask NOTICE: For help with these, refer to Using your HP W orkstation. LANIC ID Locate the contents label that comes with the workstation shipping carton. Find the LANIC ID listed there and record it here: LANIC ID _______________________________________________ Y ou can also get your LANIC ID by using the the lanscan command in a terminal window . Important Information Y ou Need to Note
1-21 IP Address and Subnetwork Mask Information Get the IP address and the subnet mask information for your worksta- tion from either your system administrator or your network adminis- trator and note them here: IP address ______________________________________________ subnet mask _____________________________________________
1-22 Y our workstation is capable of many more tasks than are described in this owner â s guide. This section gives an overview of some of the net- working capabilities of your system and directs you to the appropriate source for more information. Mail Electronic mail allows you to send and receive mail messages on your workstation. For information on setting up and using electronic mail on your workstation, contact your system administrator and also see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your worksta- tion. telnet The telnet application uses the TELNET protocol to communicate with another computer system on the network. The telnet application allows you to log on to the remote system from your workstation. For more information on telnet read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man telnet Enter rlogin The rlogin application also allows you to log on to another computer system on the network from your workstation. For more information on rlogin see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the fol- lowing at a command-line prompt: man rlogin Enter Networking Overview
1-23 ftp The ftp application is a user interface to the File T ransfer Protocol. Use ftp to copy files between your workstation and another computer system on the network. For more information see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the following at a command-line prompt: man ftp Enter rcp The rcp application allows you to remotely copy files from another computer system on a network to your workstation. For more infor- mation see the Using Y our HP W orkstation manual that came with your workstation and read the online man page by entering the fol- lowing at a command-line prompt: man rcp Enter NFS The Network File System (NFS) allows your workstation to access files on remote computer systems as if they were on your local sys- tem. The file system on the remote computer system does not have to be compatible with your workstationâ s file system. For more informa- tion see Installing and Administering NFS Servers and HP-UX System Administration T asks manuals.
2-1 Chapter 2 Using Y our CD-ROM Drive ⢠CD-ROM drive and media descriptions ⢠Loading and unloading a CD-ROM disc ⢠V erifying the CD-ROM drive operation ⢠Using device files ⢠Mounting and unmounting a CD-ROM disc ⢠Reading the busy light ⢠T roubleshooting
2-2 This chapter provides an overview of the optional CD-ROM drive and media, and describes how to use the CD-ROM drive. W e assume the CD-ROM drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 2. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICE: Be sure you have read and understand the information on mounting and unmounting CD-ROM discs before you begin using your CD-ROM disc drive. NOTICE: Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as r oot , con- tact your system administrator .
2-3 This section describes basic information needed for using the CD- ROM drive and CD-ROM discs. CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive is a random access read-only mass storage de- vice that uses removable CD-ROM discs. The drive supports the ISO 9660 and High Sierra format standards. Y ou can access information from the drive like any other disk drive, except that you cannot write to the drive. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically , and includes an embedded controller with a SCSI interface. Controls and Featur es Figure 2â1 and T able 2â1 describe the operating controls and features of the CD-ROM drive. Headphone Jack V olume Control Thumbwheel Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Hole Figur e 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Contr ols and Featur es CD-ROM Drive and CD-ROM Media Descrip- tions
2-4 T able 2â1. CD-ROM Drive Operating Contr ols and Features Y ou can plug mini-headphones with a 3.5 mm diame- ter miniature stereo plug into this jack. Use the volume control to adjust the audio output vol- ume to the headphone jack. The Busy Indicator lights during a data access opera- tion and blinks during a data transfer . The indicator blinks initially and then stays lit when there is one of the following: î A defective disc î A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) î No disc present Press the Eject Button to open the Disc T ray and in- sert or remove a disc. When the drive is in use, you must press the eject button for more than one second to open the Disc T ray . By inserting the end of a paper clip, you can open the Disc T ray when the workstation does not have power . The disc tray holds the CD-ROM disc. This style of CD-ROM drive does not use a disc caddy . The disc tray does not open if the workstation power is off. îîîîîîîîî îî îîîî î îîîîîî NOTICE: The V olume Control, Headphone Jack, and Audio Jack features of the CD-ROM drive are supported through applications only . Headphone Jack V olume Control Busy Indicator Eject Button Emergency Eject Disc T ray
2-5 CD-ROM Media CD-ROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 megabytes. The data surface contains pits and flat spots arranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. Y ou may access files and data stored on a CD- ROM disc, but you may not write files or data to a CD-ROM disc. CAUTION: Handle CD-ROM discs by the edges only . Al- ways be sure a CD-ROM disc is either in the CD-ROM drive or its protective case when not in use. This will lessen the chance of exposing the disc surface to dust. Over time, dust reduces the reliability of the read head in the CD-ROM drive. Caring for CD-ROM Discs Observe the following guidelines to help prevent data loss and pro- long the life of your CD-ROM discs and drive: ⢠Use CD-ROM discs in a clean environment to prevent dust par- ticles from scratching disc surfaces. ⢠Store CD-ROM discs in a cool, dry place to prevent moisture and heat damage. ⢠Donât try to clean the surface of a CD-ROM disc with cleaning solvents, as some cleaning solvents may damage the disc. NOTICE: Y ou must mount the disc after loading it into the drive. Refer to the section â Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc,â later in this chapter , for instructions. CD-ROM discs are iden- tical to audio compact discs (CDs), except that they store computer data.
2-6 This section describes how to perform tasks with your CD-ROM drive. Loading and Unloading a CD-ROM Disc This section describes how to load or unload a CD-ROM disc. Loading a CD-ROM Disc This CD-ROM drive has an automatic loading/ejecting feature. T o load a disc in the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1. Press and release the eject button on the CD-ROM drive. The disc tray opens partway , as shown in Figure 2â2. îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîî î î Figur e 2â2. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open Operating the CD-ROM Drive
2-7 2. Gently pull the disc tray fully open. 3. Hold the disc by the edges with the label side up and place it in the disc tray as shown in Figure 2â3. Figur e 2â3. Placing the CD-ROM Disc in the Disc T ray 4. Press down gently on the center of the CD-ROM disc to make sure it is seated on the disc tray hub, shown in Figure 2â3.
2-8 5. Gently push the disc tray in until it is closed, as shown in Figure 2â4. Figur e 2â4. Disc T ray Closed
2-9 Unloading a CD-ROM Disc T o unload a disc from the Disc T ray , follow these steps: 1. Press and release the eject button on the CD-ROM drive. The disc tray opens approximately 1 inch, as shown in Figure 2â5. Figur e 2â5. CD-ROM Disc T ray Partway Open 2. Gently pull the disc tray fully open.
2-10 3. Grasp the disc by the edges and lift it out of the disc tray , as shown in Figure 2â6. Be careful to touch only the edges of the disc. Figur e 2â6. Removing the CD-ROM Disc Fr om the Disc T ray
2-1 1 4. Gently push the disc tray in until it is closed, as shown in Figure 2â7. Figur e 2â7. Disc T ray Closed V erifying the CD-ROM Drive Operation T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. The ioscan utility verifies the configuration of all drives.
2-12 T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd sdisk Enter .
2-13 After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/0 ext_bus GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 8/0.0 target 8/0.0.0 disk QUANTUM LPS1080WD 8/0.5 target 8/0.5.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/0.6 target 8/0.6.0 disk DEC DSP3210SW 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.2 target 8/12/5.2.0 disk TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA 8/12/5.4 target 8/12/5.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST3600N 8/12/5.6 target 8/12/5.6.0 disk MICROP 2112 10 bc I/O Adapter 10/12 ext_bus GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface 10/12.4 target 10/12.4.0 disk SEAGATE ST31200W If ioscan does not see any SCSI disk drives it returns the follow- ing message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Prob- lems.â
2-14 Using Device Files Device files are special files that tell your system which pathway to use through the system hardware when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is. T o determine what device files are available for use with your CDâ ROM drive, use the following procedure: NOTICE: The device file names will depend on the nam- ing conventions of your particular system. See âSCSI ID and Device File Information for HP- UX 10.20 or Laterâ in Chapter 1 of this book. 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager (SAM) window opens. Doubleâclick on Peripheral Devices â>. 3. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on CDâ ROM Drives â>. 4. The CDâROM Drives window opens. 5. In the list of CDâROM drives, click on the desired CDâROM drive to select it. 6. From the Actions menu, click on Show Device Files. A window opens with a list of the device files for the selected CDâROM drive with an explanation of each one.
2-15 T o access information on a CD-ROM disc, you must first mount the disc. This applies to file system information only . If you wish to load a music CD, for example, you would not need to mount the disc. Mounting a disc with file system information on it gives the disc a pathname that allows your workstation to communicate electronically with it. Y ou must unmount the CD-ROM disc before removing it from the drive. CAUTION: T o use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted file sys- tem, you must mount the CD-ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc can cause a system error condi- tion and can also require rebooting the system. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root . If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator . Mounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to mount a CD-ROM disc: 1. Log in as root . If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2. Load the CD-ROM disc into the disc tray and gently push the tray into the drive. 3. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 4. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Peripheral Devicesâ>. Mounting and Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc SAM (System Adminis- tration Manager) is a util- ity that performs system administration tasks us- ing a windows graphical user interface.
2-16 5. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on Disks and File Systemsâ>. 6. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Doubleâclick on CDâROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks. The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CDâROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on thie system. Disks that are unmounted have the word âunusedâ in the Use column. 7. From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive. 8. The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the CD-ROM disc you want to mount. 9. Click on O K . 10. The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on O K . 11 . The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Mounting file system... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed.
2-17 Click on O K . Now you can access the CD-ROM disc as you would any other mounted file system. Unmounting a CD-ROM Disc Using SAM Use the following procedure to unmount a CD-ROM disc: NOTICE: Before you unmount a CD-ROM disc, make sure that your working directory (the directory in which a relative path name search begins) is set to some directory other than the one under which the disc was mounted. CAUTION: If you wish to use a CD-ROM disc as a mounted file system, you must mount the CD- ROM disc every time you load it into the drive. Y ou must also unmount the CD-ROM disc every time you unload it from the drive. Failure to mount or unmount a disc may cause a system error condition and may also require rebooting the system. 1. Log in as root . If you need information on logging in or setting up a user account, see Using Y our HP W orkstation . 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 3. The System Administration Manager window opens. Double- click on Peripheral Devices â>. 4. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Double-click on Disks and File Systems â> .
2-18 5. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on this system. 6. Highlight the disc you want to unmount and click on Remove a Hard Disk Drive from the Actions menu. 7. A window with the following message opens: Do you want to remove the disk? Click on Ye s . The system reboots. 8. Press the eject button on the CD-ROM drive and remove the CD-ROM disc from the disc tray .
2-19 Reading the Busy Light The CD-ROM busy light shows the status of the drive during the self test and during activity with the host system. The CD-ROM drive performs the self test when one of the following happens: ⢠Y ou load a disc and close the Disc T ray . ⢠Y ou turn on the workstation with a disc already loaded in the CD-ROM drive. For the self test, the busy light operates in the following sequence: 1. Light On â The busy light goes on when the disc loads into the drive. 2. Light Flashing â The light flashes six times while a read test is performed on the disc. 3. Light Off â The light goes of f when the self test is com- plete. The busy light stays on after the self test when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A defective disc ⢠A disc insertion error (for example, an upside-down disc) ⢠No disc present The busy light goes off when one of the following conditions exist: ⢠A CD-ROM drive power failure exists. ⢠The drive is idle on the SCSI bus. The busy light flashes during normal activity with the system.
2-20 T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your CD- ROM drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â
3-1 Chapter 3 Using Y our DDS T ape Drive ⢠DDS tape drive and data cassette descriptions ⢠Setting the write-protect tab on a data cassette ⢠Operating the DDS tape drive ⢠Loading and unloading a data cassette ⢠Using device files ⢠Archiving data in compressed and non-compressed mode ⢠T roubleshooting ⢠Ordering information
3-2 This chapter describes how to perform tasks that archive to and trans- fer data from the optional DDS tape drive. It also describes how to maintain and care for the drive. W e assume the DDS tape drive is set to the factory default address of SCSI ID 3. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cas- settes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
3-3 This section describes basic information needed for using your DDS tape drive and data cassettes. Depending on your configuration, your DDS drive may be a DDS-DC drive, or a DDS-2 drive. NOTICE: In most cases, the information for using these drives is the same; however , in a few instances (such as the LED codes), the information dif- fers for each drive. For the purposes of this dis- cussion, wherever we refer to simply the âDDSâ drive, that information is for both drives. Whenever the information differs, we will specify whether the information refers to the DDS-DC or the DDS-2 drive. DDS Drive Y our DDS tape drive is a 3 1/2-inch form factor DDS tape drive with data compression and a SCSI interface. It conforms to the DDS for- mat standard for storing computer data, and incorporates a data com- pression capability . Itâ s a high-capacity , high transfer-rate device for data storage on tape. Controls and Indicators Figure 3â1 shows the LEDs and eject button of the DDS drive. Cassette LED Drive LED Eject Button Figur e 3â1. DDS Drive Contr ols and Indicators DDS T ape Drive and Data Cassette Descriptions
3-4 LEDs â DDS-DC Drive This section describes the LED codes that are displayed. The front panel has two colored LEDs: the Cassette Light and the Drive Light. A green light indicates normal operation, and an amber light indicates a warning condition. Pulsing shows activity between the drive and the SCSI bus. If the Cassette Light (left LED) shows steady amber , it means that the cassette is write-protected. If the Drive Light (right LED) shows steady amber , this indicates a fault condition. T able 3â1 lists the LED codes and their meanings. T able 3â1. LED Display Codes â DDS-DC Drive Cassette Drive Meaning Light Light Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Write-Pr otect States Error States Cassette (un)loading Cassette loaded/online Cassette loaded/activity Cassette loaded/offline Media wear (caution) High humidity Self-test (normal) Self-test (failure) Key OFF Green Amber Pulsing Green Pulsing Amber Pulsing Green and Amber LEDs (light emitting diodes) indicate different activities or problems that occur with your workstation hardware
3-5 LED W arning Conditions â DDS-DC Drive The following sections describe actions to take if the LEDs indicate a warning condition. High Humidity If the LEDs display the high humidity signal, the humidity is too high and the drive does not perform any operations until the humidity drops. Self-T est (Failur e) If the LEDs display the self-test (failure) signal, a fault was diagnosed during the self tests. Note the pattern of the pulses and contact your local service representative. Media W ear (Caution) Hewlett-Packard DDS drives continually monitor the number of er- rors they have to correct when reading and writing to a tape to deter- mine tape wear and tape head cleanliness. If excessive tape wear or dirty tape heads are suspected, the drive warns you by displaying the Media W ear (Caution) signal on the LED indicators. If the LED indicators on your DDS-format drive display the Media W ear (Caution) condition, follow this procedure: 1. Check the system console for any tape error messages. A hard error during a read or write operation may have occurred. 2. Clean the heads with a cleaning cassette (HP92283K) as de- scribed in the âCleaning the T ape Headsâ section, later in this chapter . 3. Repeat the operation you performed when the Media W ear (Cau- tion) signal displayed. If the Media W ear (Caution) signal still displays, then the data cassette should be replaced.
3-6 4. If you are performing a backup from disk to tape, discard the data cassette and back up your files using a new data cassette. 5. If you are performing a restore from tape to disk, complete the restore, then discard the data cassette and back up the files to a new data cassette. LEDs â DDS-2 The front panel has two colored LEDs: the T ape Light and the Clean/ Attention Light. The T ape Light flashes green to show activity (load- ing, unloading, reading, and writing). Steady green means a cartridge is loaded. The Clean/Attention Light flashes amber to indicate head cleaning is needed or a cartridge is near the end of its life. Steady amber means a hard fault. T able 3â2. LED Display Codes â DDS-2 Drive T ape Clean/ Meaning Light Attention Activity â load or unload Activity â read or write Cartridge loaded Cleaning needed Fault Key OFF Steady Green Steady Amber Flashing Green 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off Flashing Amber 1/2 sec on, 1/2 sec off Fast Flash Green 1/4 sec on, 1/4 sec off Any Any
3-7 Data Cassettes Media Life HP DDS data cassettes are currently specified to 2000 passes over any part of the tape under optimal environmental conditions (50% relative humidity , 22 degrees C). During a tape operation, any one area of the tape may have multiple passes over the heads. This trans- lates into approximately 200 to 300 backups or restores. Under certain conditions, the life of your data cassette is less. Replace your data cassettes after 100 backups or restores if your operating conditions meet any of the following criteria: ⢠The relative humidity in your operating environment is consis- tently less than 50%. ⢠Y ou know that the backup software you are using makes multi- ple passes over sections of the tape during backups or restores. ⢠Y ou notice that when you do backups and restores the tape stops and starts frequently . Cleaning the T ape Heads Clean the heads of your tape drive after every 25 hours of tape drive use or if the Media W ear (Caution) signal is displayed on the LED. NOTICE: Only use HP Cleaning Cassettes (HP92283K) to clean the tape heads. Do not use swabs or other means of cleaning the tape heads. Follow this procedure to clean the tape heads: 1. Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive. The tape automatically loads the cassette and cleans the heads. At the end of the clean- ing cycle, the drive ejects the cassette. 2. W rite the current date on the label on the cleaning cassette so that you know how many times you have used it. Discard the cleaning cassette after you have used it 25 times.
3-8 Media Restrictions If you interchange media between other HP workstation DDS tape drives, note that data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities. This includes data cassettes that contain both compressed and noncompressed data. Setting the Write-Protect T ab on a Data Cassette Y ou can only store or change information on a data cassette when the write-protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the data cassette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write position, as shown in Figure 3â2. îîîî îîî îîîîî îîî îîîîîî îîîî îîî îîîî îîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî î Figur e 3â2. Setting the W rite-Pr otect T ab on a DDS T ape T o protect information on a data cassette from being overwritten, set the write-protect tab to the write-pr otect position, as shown in Figure 3â2. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for transferring data to a cassette.
3-9 This section describes how to perform tasks with your DDS tape drive. Loading and Unloading a Data Cassette Follow these steps to load and unload a data cassette in the DDS tape drive: 1. T urn on power to the tape drive. 2. Insert the data cassette into the drive, as shown in Figure 3â3. Eject Button Figur e 3â3. Loading a Data Cassette Operating the DDS T ape Drive
3-10 3. Push the data cassette about three quarters of the way into the drive. The drive automatically pulls the data cassette the rest of the way in. When the LEDs on the front of the drive stop flash- ing, the drive has loaded the data cassette. 4. T o remove the data cassette, press and release the eject button on the front of the drive, as shown in Figure 3â3. The LEDs on the drive flash on and off. T en to twenty seconds later , the data cas- sette slides partway out of the drive. Remove the cassette from the drive. V erifying the DDS T ape Drive Operation T ype the following: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd stape Enter
3-1 1 After a few moments the ioscan utility returns a message similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.3 target 8/12/5.3.0 tape HP HP35480A If ioscan does not see any SCSI drives it will return the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 5, âSolving Problems.â
3-12 Using Device Files Y our system has four default device files for use with your tape drive: two device files for noncompressed mode and two device files for compressed mode. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. If the SCSI address of your tape drive is not set to the factory default of SCSI ID 3, you must create a device file, then substitute the path- name of your device file in the examples that follow . Refer to the Sys- tem Administration T asks manual for information on how to create a device file. NOTICE: The device file names depend on the naming conventions of your particular system. See your Using HP-UX manuals for more information. Device Files â No Data Compression Y our system has two device files for using your tape drive with data compression turned off. The device files are named /dev/rmt/3m and /dev/rmt/3mn , and are set for SCSI ID 3. If you use the /dev/rmt/3m device file, the tape drive rewinds the data cassette every time the system releases the drive from its control. If you use the /dev/rmt/3mn device file, the drive does not rewind the data cassette. The tape stays where it was after the last operation. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. Determining A vailable Device Files 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Peripheral Devices â>. Device files are special files that tell your system which system hardware pathway to use when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is.
3-13 3. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on T ape Drives â>. 4. The T ape Drive s window opens. 5. In the list of tape drives, clock on the desired tape drive to select it. 6. From the Action menu, click on S how Device Files . A window opens with a list of the device files for the selected tape drive with an explanation of each one.
3-14 Device Files â Data Compression If you wish to use the data compression feature, use the device files /dev/rmt/3hc and /dev/rmt/3hcn , which are set for SCSI ID 3. If you use the /dev/rmt/3hc device file, the tape drive compresses the data and rewinds the data cassette every time the system releases the drive from its control. If you use the /dev/rmt/3hcn device file, the drive compresses the data, but does not rewind the data cassette. The tape stays where it was after the last operation. If you use these device files, you do not need to create any device files. Archiving Data in Compr essed and Noncompressed Mode This section describes how to transfer data to and from a DDS- for- mat data cassette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar com- mand and your tape driveâ s device file. NOTICE: Before using your DDS-format tape drive to back up your file system, make sure you read the âMedia Interchangeability Restrictionsâ section later in this chapter . The tar (tape file archiver) command allows you to save files to a data cassette, restore files from a data cassette to your system, or list files on your data cassette. The tar (tape file archiv- er) command saves files to a data cassette, re- stores files from a data cassette, or lists files on a data cassette.
3-15 Writing to a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to save files to a data cassette: 1. Check that the write-protect tab on the data cassette is in the write position. 2. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 3. In a terminal window , enter the following command line to write to the tape: tar âcvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam , and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to write to the tape. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device file names that sam listed as sup- porting compression. . Restoring Files from a Data Cassette to Y our System Use the following instructions to restore files from a data cassette to your system: 1. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2. In a terminal window , use cd to change to the directory in which you want the files to reside. 3. Enter the following command line: tar âxvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile pathname Enter
3-16 where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam , and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to restore from the tape. If pathname is not speci- fied, everything on the data cassette is restored. T o use the data compression mode, use one of the device file names that sam listed as supporting compression..
3-17 Listing the Files on a Data Cassette Use the following instructions to list the files on a data cassette: 1. Load the data cassette into the tape drive. 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command line to re- ceive a file listing of the data cassette: tar âtvf /dev/rmt/ devicefile Enter where devicefile is one of the device files listed from sam . If the tape was made with data compression, use on the the device file names that sam listed as supporting compression.
3-18 Further Command Information For additional information on using tar and a complete list of the command arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the follow- ing: man tar Enter Y ou may also communicate with the tape drive with the cpio, ftio, mt , and fbackup commands. For more information on these com- mands, enter the following in a terminal window: man command Enter Media Interchangeability Restrictions If you interchange media between DDS-format tape drives, the fol- lowing two restrictions apply to the media: ⢠Data cassettes with compressed data can only be read by tape drives that have data compression capabilities, such as the tape drive (part number C1504â67201) found in Kit A2275A #AHS. ⢠Full height (5 1/4-in) DDS-format tape drives (models HP 35470A and HP35480A) can get 1.3 GB and can read or write to 60-meter data cassettes only , if they are not using data com- pression. W ith data compression, these drives can get 2 GB and can read or write to 90-meter cassettes. T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your DDS tape drive, see Chapter 6 of this book, âSolving Problems.â The man utility looks up man pages on the sys- tem.
3-19 Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard data cassettes and cleaning cassettes for use in your DDS tape drive, use the following order numbers: ⢠HP92283A Box of five 60âmeter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92283B Box of five 90âmeter DDS data cassettes ⢠HP92300A Box of five 120-meter DDS data cassettes (for DDS-2 drive only) ⢠HP92283K Package of two cleaning cassettes ⢠HP92283L Lockable storage box for 12 cassettes CAUTION: Use only data cassettes labeled as DDS (Digital Data Storage) cassettes. Never use audio cassettes labeled DA T (Digital Audio T ape) in your DDS-format drive.
4-1 Chapter 4 Using Y our 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive ⢠Setting the write-protect tab on a diskette ⢠Inserting and removing a diskette ⢠V erifying the floppy disk drive configuration ⢠Using device files ⢠Floppy disk drive device file ⢠Formatting a new diskette ⢠T ransferring data to and from a floppy diskette ⢠Configuring the floppy driver ⢠T roubleshooting ⢠Ordering information
4-2 This chapter describes how to perform tasks that allow you to archive to or transfer data from the optional 3.5-inch floppy disk drive. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICES: When examples of user input are given in this chapter , enter them at the command-line prompt in an HP VUE terminal window or HP-UX shell. Some procedures in this chapter require you to log in as root. If you cannot log in as r oot , con- tact your system administrator .
4-3 This section describes basic information needed for using your floppy diskettes. Setting the Write-Protect T ab on a Diskette Y ou can only store or change information on a diskette when the write-protect tab is in the write position. So, before trying to write to the diskette, make sure that the write-protect tab is in the write posi- tion, as shown in Figure 4â1. Push tab up for write . Push tab down for write-protect . Figur e 4â1. Setting the W rite-Pr otect T ab on a Floppy Diskette T o protect files on a diskette from being overwritten, set the write- protect tab to the write-pr otect position. NOTICE: The write-protect tab should always be in the write position for formatting a new diskette and transferring data to a diskette. Using the Floppy Diskette
4-4 Inserting and Removing a Diskette Follow these steps to insert and remove a diskette from the floppy disk drive: 1. Insert the diskette into the drive, as shown in Figure 4â2. Eject Button Figur e 4â2. Inserting and Removing a Floppy Diskette 2. Push the diskette into the floppy drive until it clicks into place. 3. T o remove the diskette, push the eject button (see Figure 4â2), then take out the diskette.
4-5 This section describes how to perform tasks with your 3.5-inch floppy disk drive. V erifying the Floppy Drive Configuration T o verify that your workstation can communicate with the floppy drive, use the ioscan command in a terminal window to see which devices are currently in use on your system: 1. Enter the following at a command prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âd sflop Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI floppy I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: H/W Path Class Description ============================================ bc 8 bc I/O Adapter 8/12 ba Core I/O Adapter 8/12/5 ext_bus Built-in SCSI 8/12/5.0 target 8/12/5.0.0 disk TEAC FC-1 HF 07 If ioscan does not see any SCSI drives it returns the following message: ioscan: No hardware found If you receive this message, go to Chapter 6, âSolving Prob- lems.â Operating the Floppy Drive The ioscan utility verifies the configuration of all drives.
4-6 If the floppy driver is not configured, ioscan returns the follow- ing message: ioscan: Device driver scsifloppy is not in the kernel If you receive this message, go the the section, âConfiguring the Floppy Driverâ later in this chapter for information on adding the scsifloppy driver to the HP-UX kernel configuration. Using Device Files Device files are special files that tell your system which pathway to use through the system hardware when communicating with a specific device and what kind of device it is. NOTICE: The device file names depend on the naming conventions of your particular system. See âSCSI ID and Device File Information for HP- UX 10.20 or Laterâ in Chapter 1 of this book. If you set the SCSI address of your floppy drive to a value other than 0, you must create a device file for it. Refer to the System Administra- tion T asks manual for information on how to create a device file. T o determine what device files are available for use with your floppy drive, use the following procedure: 1. In a terminal window , enter the following command: sam Enter 2. The System Administration Manager window opens. Doubleâ click on Disks and File Systemsâ>. 3. The Disk and File Systems window opens.
4-7 4. In the list of drives, click on the floppy drive listing to select it. 5. From the Actions menu, click on V iew More Information. A window opens with a list of information for the floppy drive, inlcuding the device files.
4-8 Formatting a New Diskette Y ou must always format a new floppy diskette with the mediainit utility before using it. T o format a new floppy diskette follow these steps: 1. Log in as root. 2. Make sure that the write-protect tab on the floppy diskette is in the write position, as shown in Figure 4â1. 3. Insert the diskette into the floppy disk drive. 4. In a terminal window , execute mediainit with an interleave of 2 by entering the following: mediainit âi 2 devicefile Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam. T ransferring Data T o and From a Floppy Diskette This section describes how to transfer data to and from your floppy diskette (saving and restoring) using the HP-UX tar command with your floppy driveâ s device file. Y ou need to set the write protect tab to the write position to transfer data to the diskette. The write-protect tab can be in either position when restoring data from a diskette or listing the files on a diskette. The tar (tape file archiv- er) command saves files to a floppy diskette, re- stores files from a floppy diskette, or lists files on a floppy diskette.
4-9 Saving Files to a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to save files to a floppy diskette: 1. Check that the write-protect tab on the floppy diskette is in the write position. 2. Load the formatted floppy diskette into the disk drive. 3. In a terminal window enter the following command line to write to the diskette: tar âcvf devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to write to the diskette. Restoring Files from a Floppy Diskette to Y our System Use the following instructions to restore files from a floppy diskette to your system: 1. Load the floppy diskette into the disk drive. 2. In a terminal window , use the cd command to change to the di- rectory you want the files to reside in: cd dir ectory_path Enter where dir ectory_path is the pathname of the directory . 3. Enter the following command line:
4-10 tar âxvf devicefile pathname Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam and pathname is the pathname of the file or directory containing files that you want to restore from the diskette. If you do not specify path- name , everything on the floppy diskette is restored. Listing the Files on a Floppy Diskette Use the following instructions to list the files on a floppy diskette: 1. Load the floppy diskette into the disk drive. 2. In a terminal window , enter the following command line: tar âtvf devicefile Enter where devicefile is the device file as listed by sam All files on the floppy diskette are listed. For More Information For more information on using tar and a complete list of the com- mand arguments, refer to the tar man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man tar Enter Y ou can mount the floppy drive as a file system using the SAM util- ity . Be sure to unmount the drive before removing it as a file system. For more information about how to mount and unmount the floppy drive, see the manual Using HP-UX (B2910â90001). For more information on copying data to or from your system to other media, including your floppy diskette, refer to the cpio man page by typing the following in a terminal window: The man utility looks up man pages on the sys- tem.
4-1 1 man cpio Enter For more information on copying to or from DOS files, refer to the doscp man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man doscp Enter For more information on listing DOS directories, refer to the dosls man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man dosls Enter For more information on using your floppy disk drive and floppy dis- kettes, refer to the floppy man page by typing the following in a ter- minal window: man floppy Enter For more information on using the mediainit command, refer to the mediainit man page by typing the following in a terminal window: man mediainit Enter
4-12 Configuring the Floppy Driver If you reload software or rebuild the Instant Ignition system on your workstation, you need to reconfigure the HP-UX Kernel to add the floppy driver . Use the SAM utility to add the SCSI flexible disk driv- er and build a new HP-UX kernel. For more information about how to reconfigure the kernel using SAM, see the following manuals: ⢠System Administration T asks HP 9000 Series 700 Computers (B2355â90040) ⢠Using HP-UX (B2910â90001) T r oubleshooting If you have trouble with any of these procedures for using your floppy disk drive, see Chapter 5 of this book, âSolving Problems.â Ordering Information T o order Hewlett-Packard micro flexible diskettes for use in your 3.5-inch floppy disk drive, use the following order number: HPâ92192X High-Density Micro Flexible Disks (1.44MB Formatted Capacity) â box of ten diskettes
5-1 Chapter 5 Solving Pr oblems ⢠Common problems and solutions ⢠Dealing with a boot failure ⢠Memory failures ⢠LCD-indicated problems ⢠Running system verification tests
5-2 This chapter contains information to help you determine whatâ s wrong with your system when you have problems. If you have a problem that isnât listed in this chapter , or if your problem persists, contact your designated service representative. When calling for ser- vice, always have your systemâ s model number and serial number ready . The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 graphical interface. If your system is configured with the HP CDE graphical user interface, use command line options in a terminal win- dow to perform tests. NOTICE: The J282/2240 power supply draws about 50 W atts in standby mode(system of f) and will turn on a fan when required to cool the supply . NOTICE: The J282/2240 fan failure circuitry requires that the power cord must be disconnected for 30 seconds after any fan failure.
5-3 The tables in this section list common problems you may encounter with your workstation. The tables also tell you what to do to help solve the problems. T able 5â1. Pr oblems Powering Up the System Problem Solution The power LED doesnât light. The power LED lights, but the screen is blank or flickers LCD messages Make sure all ac power cables are connected securely to the system. Make sure the power cord is plugged into a working ac outlet. Make sure the power switch is set to the ON position. Press the brightness control on the monitor to adjust it. If the screen is still blank, turn off the system and monitor power switches. When the system is completely powered off, check the video cable connections. Go to the section âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B for in- formation about displaying and setting your workstationâ s monitor configura- tion. See âLCD-Indicated Problemsâ later in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative. Common Problems and Solutions
5-4 T able 5â2. Pr oblems Loading and Booting the Operating System Problem Solution The power LED is lit, and text appears on the screen, but more than two min- utes have passed with no sign of system activity . The system stops or hangs while booting. Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Appendix C for default SCSI ID settings.) Check that all SCSI devices are cor- rectly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failure, â later in this chapter . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-5 T able 5â3. Pr oblems with the 802.3 Network Problem Solution Canât reach other systems on the net- work. Applications that rely on the net- work wonât run. Check the network connector on the back of the system unit. Make sure that the network cable or transceiver is fastened securely to the connector . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-6 T able 5â4. Pr oblems Using a Hard Disk Drive Problem Solution The disk drive is not accessible or does not respond. If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative. Make sure that all SCSI devices are set to the proper SCSI ID. (See Ap- pendix C for default SCSI ID set- tings.) Check that all SCSI devices are cor- rectly cabled. Check that the SCSI bus is correctly terminated. (See Appendix C for information on SCSI cabling and termination.) Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Ap- pendix B. Follow the instructions in âDealing W ith a Boot Failure â later in this chapter .
5-7 T able 5â5. Pr oblems Using the CD-ROM Drive Problem Solution The CD-ROM drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them cor- rectly . Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Appendix B. Follow the instructions in the section entitled â Running System V erifica- tion T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the CD-ROM drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-8 T able 5â6. Pr oblems Using the DDS T ape Drive Problem Solution The DDS tape drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you specified the cor- rect device file name for commands that require a device file name. Make sure the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a data cassette. Make sure that the system can com- municate with the drive as described in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ in Ap- pendix B. Follow the instructions in the section entitled âRunning System V erification T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the tape drive is functioning prop- erly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-9 T able 5â7. Pr oblems Using the Floppy Disk Drive Problem Solution The floppy drive does not respond to commands. Re-enter the commands and make sure that you have typed them correctly . Make sure that you specified the de- vice file /dev/rfloppy/c201d0s0 for commands that require a device file name. Make sure that the write-protect tab is set to write if you are trying to copy data to a floppy diskette. Follow the instructions in the section entitled â Running System V erification T ests â later in this chapter to verify that the floppy drive is functioning properly . If problems persist, contact your system administrator or call your designated service representative.
5-10 If your usual boot device (typically a disk) is not responding as it should, you must try to boot from the disk (or another boot device) by selecting it manually . T o boot a device manually , follow these steps: 1. Follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interface,â in Appendix D of this book. NOTICE: Y our workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before it terminates the power . 2. At the Main Menu prompt, type the following: Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > search ipl Enter This causes your workstation to search exhaustively for bootable media. 3. Boot from one of the listed devices by typing the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter a command or a menu > boot device Enter where device is the hardwar e path to the device, specified in mnemonic style notation, such as FWSCSI.5.0. 4. If your workstation still fails to boot, there is either something wrong with the file system or with the hardware. If you suspect a file system failure, see the manual Using HP-UX for help on dealing with file system failures. If you think that something is wrong with the hardware, continue reading this chapter for more troubleshooting information. Dealing with a Boot Failure The search command looks for bootable media on your workstation.
5-1 1 J Class systems use Memory Page Deallocation, a feature that allows the system to provide information to the operating system about memory failures. HP-UX 10.20 uses Memory Page Deallocation information to map out the failing memory areas, and continue normal operation. Y ou can use the command memrpt with the detail switch to obtain informa- tion about the Memory Page Deallocation T able (PDT) as well as single bit errors logged by the system. # /usr/sbin/sysdiag Enter DUI >logtool Enter LOGTOOL> memrpt detail Enter NOTICE: Y ou must be logged in as superuser to use the memrpt command. T o exit the sysdiag and logtool utilities, use the exit command. The pdt can also be checked using the pdt command in the Service menu of the boot console handler . If a failing DIMM is replaced, use the Service menu pdt clear command to clear out the PDT . Memory Failures
5-12 Y our workstation uses an LCD panel to display firmware/OS progress codes. The codes, referred to as chassis codes, consist of one of the mnemonics listed below , followed by a 4-digit hex number identify- ing the code module being executed. The mnemonics and their mean- ing are: ⢠FL T â A hardware error has been detected ⢠TEST â Hardware being tested ⢠INIT â Hardware being initialized ⢠SHUT â System being shutdown ⢠W ARN â A non-optimal operating condition exists ⢠RUN â System is running operating system During a normal boot sequence, a set of âwindowsâ appear . In gener- al, the LCD display has the following format: â î îîî î â î îîî î îîîî îîîî î î î îî ⥠îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîîîîîî ZZZZ > 4 character OSTAT YYYY > 4 digit hex code CPUXX > Functional CPUs in system ⥠> Heart beat WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW > Text Diagnostic Message LCD-Indicated Problems
5-13 The windows are as follows: Window 1 When the system is hard booted, the LCD will be cleared and the fol- lowing message will be displayed for approximately 1 second. Then the processor dependent hardware (pdh) is verified. Proceeding To <â line 1 Turn DC On <â line 2 Window 2 While the pdh is being verified, the following message is displayed: ZZZZ YYYY <â line 1 Selftest Sys Bd <â line 2 Window 3 After the pdh is verified, the selftest is executed. The display changes to: ZZZZ YYYY ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change Selftest <â line 2 Window 4 When the selftest is complete, the message (once the console is found) is: ZZZZ YYYY CPUXX ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change AAAAAAAA console <â line 2 where AAAAAA is RS-232A, RS-232B, or GRAPHICS.
5-14 Window 5 When an attempt to boot is made, the following message is displayed once IPL is successfully loaded and launched: ZZZZ YYYY CPUXX ⥠<â line 1 â â ⥠â flashes with Z Y field change BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB <â line 2 where BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB is the model number (for example, 9000/J200). If the system encounters an FL T code while the system is booting, the FL T code is interpreted and a messages is displayed. For the meaning of the fault code, see the J Class Service Handbook.
5-15 HP-UX uses a diagnostics product called the Support T ools Manager that allows system operation verification. Y ou can access the Support T ools Manager in a terminal window . If you are using HP VUE as your interface, you can also access the Sup- port T ools Manager through the sys_admin directory . Three interfaces are available with the Support T ools Manager: a command line interface (accessed through the cstm command), a menu-driven interface (accessed through the mstm command), and the graphical user interface (accessed through the xstm command). For more information on these user interfaces, see the online man pages by entering the following at a command line prompt: man cstm Enter man mstm Enter man xstm Enter T o access the Support T ools Manager , perform the following steps: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control Running System V erification T ests
5-16 A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: cstm Enter The following screen appears: Support Tool Manager Version A.01.00 Type âhelpâ for a list of available commands. CSTM> At the CSTM> prompt, you can enter several commands. T o see what commands are available, type the help command. 4. T o verify the system operation, type the following at the CSTM> prompt: CSTM> verify all Enter Messages similar to the following appear: Verification has started on device (CPU). Verification has started on device (FPU). CSTM>Verification of (FPU) has completed. CSTM>Verification of (CPU) has completed. 5. Press Enter to return to the CSTM> prompt after all test results are reported.
5-17 6. T o exit the Support T ools Manager , type the following: CSTM> exit Enter If any tests failed, further diagnosis is necessary by qualified service personnel. Contact your designated service representative.
A-1 Appendix A Safety and Regulatory Statements ⢠Declaration of conformity ⢠Emissions regulations ⢠Emissions regulations compliance ⢠Datacom users statement ⢠Acoustics ⢠Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions ⢠Laser safety statements ⢠W arnings and cautions This appendix contains safety and regulatory statements pertaining to your J282/2240 workstation.
A-2
A-3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Canadian Department of Communications. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor- dance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (determined by turning the equipment off and on), you can correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Ask the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help. Hewlett-Packardâ s system certification tests were conducted with HP- supported peripheral devices and HP shielded cables, such as those you receive with your computer . Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user â s authority to operate the equipment. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference. ⢠This device must accept interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation. ⢠Cables used with this device must be properly shielded to com- ply with the requirements of the FCC. Emissions Regulations
A-4 Any third-party I/O device installed in HP system(s) must be in ac- cordance with the requirements set forth in the preceding Emissions Regulations statements. In the event that a third-party noncompliant I/O device is installed, the customer assumes all responsibility and liability arising therefrom. Regulation On Noise Declaration For Machines â3. GSGV Lpa <70dB Lpa <70dB operator position am Arbeitsplatz normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 T .19 VCCI CLASS 2 Emissions Regulations Compliance Acoustics
A-5 Electrostatic charges can damage the integrated circuits on printed circuit boards. T o prevent such damage from occurring, observe the following precautions during board unpacking and installation: ⢠Stand on a static-free mat. ⢠W ear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic charge is dischar ged from your body to ground. ⢠Connect all equipment together , including the static-free mat, static strap, routing nodes, and peripheral units. ⢠Keep uninstalled printed circuit boards in their protective anti- static bags. ⢠Handle printed circuit boards by their edges, once you have re- moved them from their protective antistatic bags. The V isible LED on this product is classified as â Class 1 LED PRODUCT â in accordance with EN 60825â1 . Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions V isible LEDs
A-6 (For workstations that have a CD ROM drive installed.) The CD-ROM mass storage system is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Contr ol for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the mass storage system does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Because laser light emitted inside the mass storage system is completely confined within protective housings and exter- nal covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) IEC 825 Class 1 Laser Label
A-7 W ARNING: Removing device cover may expose sharp edges in equipment chassis. T o avoid injury , use care when installing customer add-on devices. W ARNUNG: Das Entfernen der Geräteabdeckung legt die scharfen Kanten im Inneren des Gerätes frei. Um V erietzungen zu vermeiden, seien Sie vorsichtig beim Einbau von zusätzlichen Bauteilen, die vom Kunden selber eingebaut werden können. A VER TISSEMENT : Des bords tranchants du châssis de lâéquipement peuvent être exposés quand le cache de lâunité nâest pas en place. Pour éviter des blessures, faire très attention lors de lâinstallation de modules supplémentaires par le client. W ARNING: Disconnect power plug from wall outlet or power source before moving or removing the device, or installing add-on components. W ARNUNG: Entfernen Sie die Stromzuführung von der Steckdose oder der Stromquelle bevor Sie das Gerät bewegen, abbauen, oder zusätzliche Bauteile installieren. A VER TISSEMENT : Débrancher la fiche de la prise de courant ou de la source dâalimentation électrique avant de déplacer ou de retirer lâunité, ou avant dâinstaller des modules supplémentaires. W ARNING: Lithium batteries may explode if mistreated. Do not put lithium batteries in fires or try to recharge or disassemble them. Replace battery only with Matsushita Electric BRâ2325 three-volt lithium battery (HP part number 1420â0314)! Use of any other battery may cause fire or explosion. W arnings and Cautions
A-8
B-1 Appendix B Changing Y our W orkstationâ s Hardware Configuration ⢠Checking the SCSI IDs ⢠Opening the system unit ⢠Closing the system unit ⢠Installing removable media devices ⢠Adding a hard drive ⢠Installing additional memory ⢠Installing an EISA or graphics board ⢠Changing your monitor type
B-2 This appendix describes the procedures to change your workstationâ s hardware configuration. The instructions in this appendix assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. CAUTION: Always wear a properly grounded wrist strap when reconfiguring your workstation. Use the following tools to remove or replace hardware parts when changing your configuration: ⢠Light-duty flat blade screwdriver with 150 mm (6 in.) blade ⢠Number 1 Posi-drive driver ⢠T10, T15, and T20 T orx drivers ⢠Needlenose pliers Also, read the ESD Precautions in Appendix A of this guide.
B-3 T o determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use on your system, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single- click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âf Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: Checking the SCSI IDs
B-4 Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ========================================================================== bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/12 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/12/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/12/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/12/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/12/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/12/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/12/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/12/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/12/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/12/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/12/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/12/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/12/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/12/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter graphics 0 10/0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics graphics 1 10/8 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 7 10/20/5/3.0.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 8 10/20/5/3.1.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 9 10/20/5/3.2.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
B-5 4. Y ou can determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by look- ing under the H/W Path heading. The J2240 lists 8/4/19/0 as the built-in SCSI bus controller . For devices connected to the built- in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/4/19/0.6 .0 tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 6 on the SCSI bus. NOTICE: Never use SCSI address 7 for any device. Ad- dress 7 is reserved for the SCSI controller .
B-6 Perform the following steps to open the system unit: 1. Power off the system, the monitor , and any peripheral devices. Unplug the system unit power cord and the power cord of any peripheral devices from ac wall outlets. Refer to Using Y our HP W orkstation for the proper method of shutting down your work- station. 2. Attach the static-grounding wrist strap by following the instruc- tions on the package. Attach the sticky end of the wrist strap to bare metal on the back panel of the system unit. 3. Press down on the two buttons on the top front of the worksta- tion, releasing the front panel (also known as the front bezel) as shown in Figure Bâ1. Opening the System Unit
B-7 Figur e Bâ1. Removing the Fr ont Panel 4. Swing the panel down and pull up slightly so the two guide pins on the bottom clear their guides and lay the front cover down.
B-8 Perform the following steps to close the system unit: CAUTION: Do not attempt to operate the workstation with the front cover removed. The cover is needed for proper air flow for system cooling. 1. Insert the two guide pins on the bottom of the front cover into the guides on the bottom of the system unit. 2. Swing the front cover up, and push it firmly into the workstation housing. The front panel edges automatically align with the workstation housing, and the top latch buttons pop up into posi- tion. See Figure Bâ2. NOTICE: T o maintain FCC/EMI compliance, verify that the top latches snap completely into position. Closing the System Unit
B-9 Figur e Bâ2.Replacing the Front Panel 3. Reconnect the power cables and any other cables that you dis- connected when opening the workstation, then power on any pe- ripherals, the monitor , and the system unit.
B-10 Y our workstation can have any two of the following removable media devices, with no two the same: ⢠CD-ROM drive ⢠2 to 8 GB, 4 mm DDS tape drive ⢠3.5-inch Floppy disk drive Follow these steps for installing any of the removable media drives into the Storage Assembly . The steps for checking and setting drive jumpers are different for each drive. Jumper information for each drive is included in these steps. NOTICE: Before opening the system unit, follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDs,â earlier in this appendix, to determine the SCSI IDs currently in use on your workstation. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in âOpening the System Unit,â earlier in this appendix. 2. Unscrew the two captive screws on the left side of the Storage Assembly and pull down the drawer ejector handle on the right side of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ3. The Storage Assembly slides partway out of the drawer . Installing Removable Media Devices
B-1 1 î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ3.Removing Storage Drawer fr om System Unit 3. Pull the Storage Assembly out as far as it will go. (A safety catch prevents the drawer from coming all the way out.) NOTICE: When sliding the Storage Assembly out of the system unit, move the drawer ejector handle to prevent the Storage Assembly from hitting it. 4. Push in on the safety catch and continue pulling the drawer out. Be sure to support the drawer from the bottom.
B-12 5. Set the drawer on a flat surface. 6. Disconnect the power distribution cable from the Fan extender cable. î îîîî îîîîîîîî î îîîî îîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîî Figur e Bâ4.Removing F AN fr om EMI Plate 7. Disconnect the Fan extender cable form the SCSI PCA.
B-13 îî îî îîî îî îî îîî Figur e Bâ5.Removing EMI Plate 8. Remove the two Mâ3 screws from the fan.
B-14 Figur e Bâ6.Removing F AN/EMI Plate 9. Unscrew the captive screw holding the F AN/EMI plate at the back of the removable drives and lift the plate up and out of the drawer , as shown in Figure Bâ6. 10. Disconnect the SCSI and power cables from the drive.
B-15 11 . Unscrew the two screws holding the drive in the storage drawer , and slide the drive out of the drawer . See Figure Bâ7. Figur e Bâ7.Removing Drive Scr ews 12. Check the SCSI address/jumper settings on the replacement drive, using the following information sections.
B-16 CD-ROM Drive The CD-ROM drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 2. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 2 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: CD-ROM drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the CD-ROM drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the CD-ROM driveâ s address, follow these instructions, referring to Figure Bâ8. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address, go to Step 10 of this installation pro- cedure. 1. Locate the jumpers at the back of the CD-ROM drive. 2. T o change the address, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your CD-ROM driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive.
B-17 SCSI ID 3 2 default 1 4 5 6 SCSI ID 0 Figur e Bâ8.CD-ROM Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings
B-18 DDS T ape Drive The DDS tape drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 3 and the Operation Mode switches set for correct drive opera- tion. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 3 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: SCSI tape drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the DDS tape drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the DDS tape driveâ s address or operation mode, follow these instructions, referring to Figure Bâ9 for the DDS-DC drive, Figure Bâ10 for the DDS-2 drive, and Figure Bâ1 1 for operation mode. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address or operation mode, go to Step 10 of this installa- tion procedure. 1. Locate the jumpers at the back of the DDS tape drive. 2. T o change the jumper settings, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your DDS tape driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive. 4. If you need to change the Operation Mode switches, locate the switches on the underside of the DDS tape drive. Switches 1 and 2 are used to configure the data compression operation mode. Switches 3 through 8 are used to specify drive connectivity and functionality according to host or customer requirements. The default setting is all switches ON. Figure NO T AG shows the available options.
B-19 T arget ID Jumpers 0 1 2 3 Jumpers 4 5 6 T arget ID SCSI T erminators (must be removed) (Default) T erm PWR ID2 ID1 ID0 ID2 ID1 ID0 T erm PWR Figur e Bâ9.DDS-DC T ape Drive SCSI Addr ess/Jumper Settings
B-20 SCSI ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SCSI ID (Default) T erm PWR* Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 T erm PWR* SCSI Connector Power Connector Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0 T erm PWR *T erm PWR is not used in HP workstation configurations. Figur e Bâ10.DDS-2 T ape Drive and SCSI Addr ess/Jumper Settings
B-21 Operation Mode Switches ON 1 23 456 78 ON 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 Compression Disabled, No Host Control Compression Enabled, No Host Control Compression Disabled, Host Can Control Compression Compression Enabled, With Host Control îî îîîîî îî îîîîî ON 1 23 456 78 ON 1 23 456 78 Figur e Bâ1 1.Switch Settings for Data Compression Operation Mode
B-22 Floppy Drive The floppy disk drive ships with the drive set to SCSI ID address 0. W e recommend keeping the address setting at 0 unless it is used by another device. CAUTION: Floppy disk drives are susceptible to mechanical and electrostatic shock. When handling the drive, always wear the static-grounding wrist strap that came in the floppy disk drive kit. Always handle the drive carefully . If you need to change the floppy disk driveâ s address, follow these instructions, referring to Figures Bâ12 and Bâ13. If you do not need to change the driveâ s address, go to Step 10 of this installation procedure. 1. Locate the jumpers on the top of the floppy drive. 2. T o change the jumpers, use needlenose pliers to set the driveâ s SCSI ID to an address that is not used by another SCSI device. Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your floppy driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. 3. Use needlenose pliers to remove the SCSI terminators, if still attached to the drive.
B-23 SCSI ID Address Jumpers à à à T op V iew of Floppy Disk Drive î î ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 Jumper in = 0; out = 1 SCSI ID Address Jumpers ID 0 ID 1 ID 2 Jumpers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SCSI ID Address î Figur e Bâ12.Floppy Drive SCSI Address/Jumper Settings
B-24 Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã Ã T op V iew of Floppy Disk Drive 1 2 3 SCSI T erminators Figur e Bâ13.Floppy Drive T erminators
B-25 13. Figure Bâ14 shows the orientation of each of the removable me- dia drives in the bracket and the position of the screws holding the drive bracket in place. The same bracket can be used on all three drives. îîîîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ14.Attaching Removable Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation
B-26 14. W ith the disk mounting bracket between the guides on each side of the Storage Assembly , slide the disk into the Storage Assem- bly , securing it with the two side screws. See Figure Bâ15. Do not over-tighten the side screws. Reconnect the drive SCSI and power cables here. Figur e Bâ15.Replacing Drive Scr ews 15. Reconnect the cabling from the back of the drive to the side of the drawer assembly . See Figure NO T AG. 16. Secure the EMI plate at the back of the removable drives with the captive screw in the bottom of the plate. 17. Slide the drawer back in.
B-27 18. Push the drawer ejector handle up until the Storage Assembly slides all the way into the system unit and secure the two captive screws on the left of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ16. NOTICE: If the ejector handle is not pushed completely in, you may not have proper seating of the SCSI PCB interconnect to the backplane. î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ16.Replacing the Storage Drawer Assembly
B-28 19. Follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDsâ earlier in this appendix, to verify that your workstation can see the newly installed drive. For information about using your drives see the following chapters in this book: ⢠Using your CD-ROM drive is in Chapter 3. ⢠Using your DDS tape drive is in Chapter 4. ⢠Using your floppy drive is in Chapter 5.
B-29 This section describes how to add a hard drive to your workstation. The first part deals with installing a hard drive and the second part tells you how to configure your hard disk after it is installed. Y our workstation can have two hard drives. The hard drive that came with your workstation was set to SCSI ID 6. If you are adding a se- cond hard disk, the second hard disk will use SCSI ID 5. If another device on your workstation is using SCSI ID 5, change the hard diskâ s SCSI ID to an unused SCSI ID. NOTICE: Do not use SCSI ID 7 for your hard driveâ s SCSI address. The host SCSI controller uses SCSI ID 7. If you are adding a second hard drive, we advise you not to use SCSI ID 6 which is normally reserved for the boot disk drive. Check the jumpers on the hard drive you plan to install. Figure Bâ17 shows the correct SCSI address for the jumpers on your drive. These jumpers are the only jumpers you may need to change on the drive. 1. Use a pair of small needle-nose pliers to set the SCSI ID jumpers to SCSI ID 5 if you are adding a second hard drive, or SCSI ID 6 if this is the first hard drive (you are running diskless). Check that the other jumpers are set correctly . 2. If you removed the disk drive mounting bracket from the disk drive, replace it now , making sure not to over-tighten the screws. Figure Bâ18 shows the orientation of the drive in the bracket for both drives and the position of the screws holding the drive bracket in place. Be sure the printed circuit side of one drive is facing the printed circuit side of the other drive. Adding a Hard Drive
B-30 îîîîîîîî î î îî îî îîîîîîî 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 îîîîîîî îîîîîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ17.T ypical Har d Drive Jumper Settings
B-31 PCB Side of Drive T op Drive Bottom Drive Figur e Bâ18.Replacing Hard Drive Mounting Bracket and Drive Orientation
B-32 Installing a Hard Disk Drive Perform the following steps to install a hard disk drive. NOTICE: Before opening the system unit, follow the instructions in âChecking the SCSI IDs,â earlier in this appendix, to determine the SCSI IDs currently in use on your workstation. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in âOpening the System Unit,â earlier in this appendix. 2. Unscrew the two captive screws on the left side of the Storage Assembly and pull down the drawer ejector handle on the right side of the Storage Assembly , as shown in Figure Bâ19. The Storage Assembly slides partway out of the drawer .
B-33 î îî îîîîîîî îîîîî îîîî îîîîîîî îîîîî îî îîîîî î îîî îîî îîî îîîîîîî îî îîîî îîîîî îîîîîî îîîîîîî îîîîîî Figur e Bâ19.Removing Storage Drawer fr om System Unit 3. Pull the Storage Assembly out as far as it will go. (A safety catch prevents the drawer from coming all the way out.) NOTICE: When sliding the Storage Assembly out of the system unit, move the drawer ejector handle to prevent the Storage Assembly from hitting it. 4. Press in on the safety catch on each side of the drawer to allow the drawer all the way out and place the drawer on a flat surface.
B-34 5. Be sure you have already checked the SCSI ID of the drive you want to install using the method described at the beginning of this section. 6. W ith the disk mounting bracket between the guides on each side of the Storage Assembly , slide the disk into the Storage Assem- bly , securing it to the drawer with two side screws. See Figure Bâ20. Do not over-tighten the side screws. The drives should be placed in the drive bays with the bottom of each drive toward the middle, as shown in Figure Bâ20. Refer to Figure Bâ18 for drive orientation in the bracket. Figur e Bâ20.Placing Har d Drives in Storage Drawer
B-35 7. Reconnect the SCSI and power cables from the back of the drive to the side of the drawer assembly . 8. Slide the drawer back in and secure. 9. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix. 10. Follow the instructions in the âChecking the SCSI IDsâ subsec- tion to verify that your workstation can see the hard drive. Configuring a Hard Drive This section describes how to add a hard disk drive to your system as a file system using SAM. For more information about configuring a hard disk drive, refer to the System Administration T asks manual. The procedures in this chapter require you to log in as r oot . If you cannot log in as root, contact your system administrator . 1. Log in as root. 2. Move the mouse pointer to the up arrow above the T oolbox control and click the left mouse button. T oolbox Control Up Arrow
B-36 3. The T oolbox subpanel opens. Click on the General toolbox icon, shown below . 4. A file manager window appears with a number of icons in it. Double-click on the System_Admin toolbox icon. 5. Move the mouse cursor to the SAM icon shown below (your icon can look like either of these) and double-click the left mouse button. 6. The System Administration Manager window opens. Double- click on Peripheral Devices â>. 7. The Peripheral Devices window opens. Doubleâclick on Disks and File Systems â> . 8. The Disks and File Systems window opens. Double-click on CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks . SAM (System Adminis- tration Manager) is a util- ity that performs system administration tasks us- ing a windows graphical user interface.
B-37 The following screen message appears: Scanning the systemâs hardware... The CD-ROM, Floppy , and Hard Disks window opens con- taining a list of drives currently configured on this system. 9. From the Actions menu, click on Add a Hard Disk Drive. 10. The Select a Disk to Add... window opens with a list of unused disks. Highlight the hard disk drive you want to add to your sys- tem. 11 . Click on O K . 12. The Set Disk Usage and Options... window opens. Select File System and click on O K . 13. The following screen messages appear: Task started. Creating the device file... Modifying â/etc/checklistâ... Task completed. Click on O K .
B-38 T ake a moment to read over the following important notes about installing memory: ⢠Before trying to install additional memory DIMMs in your J282/2240 workstation, use the procedure described in Appendix D, âThe Boot Console Interface,â to determine the current memory configuration for this workstation. ⢠Read over the steps involved in installing memory DIMMs before you begin. ⢠DIMMs must be inserted in the order shown. Refer to Figure Bâ24. ⢠Y ou must insert DIMMs in pairs of equal size. ⢠Be aware that it is possible to insert the DIMMs backwards into the connectors. Be sure therefore, that you understand the prop- er orientation for DIMMs going into the connectors. See Figure Bâ25. ⢠When you have finished installing additional DIMMs, use the Boot Console Interface to verify that they are seen by the work- station. Perform the following steps to add memory DIMMs to your worksta- tion. Note the instructions in Step 8 of this section on DIMM configu- ration before beginning these steps. 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in the âOpening the System Unitâ section earlier in this appendix. 2. Remove the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . 3. Release the ejector tabs on the left side, top and bottom of the CPU Assembly . Refer to Figure Bâ21. Installing Additional Memory
B-39 Ejector T ab Ejector T ab Figur e Bâ21.Removing the CPU Assembly 4. Pull the CPU Assembly straight out and place on a flat surface with an antistatic mat. NOTICE: The CPU Assembly is heavy , very warm and has no safety catch. Be sure to pull it out slow- ly , making sure it is properly supported. 5. Use Figure Bâ22 to locate the memory DIMMs on the CPU As- sembly .
B-40 Memory Bracket Memory DIMMs Figur e Bâ22.Memory Retention Bracket and Memory DIMM Loca- tion NOTICE: When installing DIMMs you need to orient the notch toward the white ejector handles. 6. T o install a new memory DIMM, turn the CPU assembly until the memory DIMMs are in the position shown in Figure Bâ23.
B-41 î îîîîî îîî î î îîîîîîîî îîîîî Figur e Bâ23.CPU Assembly Orientation 7. Refer to the Position Guide on the CPU board that states, â<ââ POSITION MEM MODULE AS SHOWN,â as shown in Figure Bâ23. 8. Install pairs of DIMMs in the following order: Pair 1 (0A, 0B), Pair 2 (1A, 1B), Pair 3 (2A, 2B), and so on. This workstation has 16 memory slots, labeled 0A, 0B through 7A, 7B. Memory DIMMs must be installed in pairs of equal size, with the largest pairs installed first, followed in order from lar g- est to smallest pairs. Figure Bâ24 gives the recommended order for installing pairs of DIMMs. Any Combination of memory may be used, although, for maxi- mum performance, we recommend using common-sized memory DIMMs; for example, either all 128 MB, 256 MB, or 512 MB DIMM pairs. Therefore, to achieve both maximum performance
B-42 and maximum future capacity , use 512 MB DIMM pairs exclu- sively . Front of System 3B 7B 3A 7A 5B 1B 5A 1A 2B 6B 2A 6A 4B 0B 4A 0A Pair 4 Pair 2 Pair 3 Pair 1 Pair 8 Pair 6 Pair 7 Pair 5 CPU Modules J18 J17 J16 J15 J31 J30 J29 J28 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 J20 J19 Figur e Bâ24. Memory DIMM Sequence 9. Open the ejector tab by pressing down on it at the left of the con- nector . Refer to Figure Bâ25.
B-43 10. Place the DIMM in the connector , lining it up with the guides. Make sure to put the notched end toward the white ejector han- dle (to the left). îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîî îîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî î îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîî îîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîîî Figur e Bâ25.Installing Memory Cards 11 . Close the ejector tab. 12. Press firmly and evenly on the DIMM to ensure that it seats properly . 13. T o replace the CPU Assembly in the system unit, first align the top of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. Re- fer to Figure Bâ26 and to the label on the back of the assembly . Be sure to support the CPU Assembly properly while replacing it.
B-44 Figur e Bâ26.Replacing the CPU Assembly
B-45 Next, align the bottom of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. W ith the ejector latches in the open position, slide the CPU Assembly into the system unit as far as it will go. See Figure Bâ26. 14. Press the ejector tabs all the way in and press on the left edge of the processor module sheet metal to ensure that the processor module is completely seated in the connector . Replace the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Make sure the ejec- tors are completely depressed to ensure proper connector seating. 15. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix. 16. T o verify that this installation was successful, follow the steps in Appendix D of this book, âThe Boot Console Interface,â on dis- playing memory information. If you have only replaced a faulty DIMM, you must issue the pdt clear command in the service menu of the Boot Console Interface. Answer yes ( y) to the prompt â Continue? (Y/N) >. â
B-46 Perform the following steps to replace the processor module on your workstation: 1. Open the system unit according to the directions in the âOpening the System Unitâ section earlier in this appendix. 2. Remove the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Ejector T ab Ejector T ab Figur e Bâ27.Removing the CPU Assembly 3. Release the ejector latches on the left side, top, and bottom of the CPU Assembly . Refer to Figure Bâ27. Replacing the Processor Module
B-47 4. Pull the CPU Assembly straight out and place on a flat surface with an antistatic mat. 5. Locate the CPU shroud as shown in Figure Bâ28. Shroud Figur e Bâ28.CPU Shr oud Location J282/2240 6. Disconnect the fan cable(s) from the system board. NOTICE: Be sure to reconnect the fan cables when you have finished installing the processor . The fan not being connected will cause the system to shut down after about 15 seconds of operation. 7. Remove the two screws attaching the shroud cover to the shroud, then slide cover off. Set the shroud cover aside.
B-48 NOTICE: The Model 282 and 2240 can be configured with two processors. A single processor must be located in slot 0. Do not mix 282 and 2240 processors in the same system. 8. When replacing a processor module, you must also remove the dust cover it was shipped with. Grasp the module and pull the dust cover evenly to remove. 9. Install the processor by aligning the plastic guide rails on the shroud with the rails on the processor . firmly seat module. Figur e Bâ29.J282/2240 Pr ocessor Modules
B-49 10. Insert the board containing the processor module into the guides and press firmly into place. 11 . Reconnect the fan cable to the system board. 12. Replace the CPU shroud over the processor and replace the four screws attaching the CPU shroud to the system board 13. T o replace the CPU Assembly in the system unit, first align the top of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. Re- fer to Figure Bâ30 and to the label on the back of the assembly . Be sure to support the CPU Assembly properly while replacing it. Figur e Bâ30.Replacing the CPU Assembly
B-50 Next, align the bottom of the CPU Assembly with the guide on the system unit. W ith the ejector latches in the open position, slide the CPU Assembly into the system unit as far as it will go. See Figure Bâ30. 14. Press the ejector tabs all the way in and press on the left edge of the processor module sheet metal to ensure that the processor module is completely seated in the connector . Replace the two screws in the center of the CPU Assembly . Make sure the ejec- tors are completely depressed to ensure proper connector seating. 15. Close the system unit and reconnect all cables as described in the âClosing the System Unitâ section in this appendix.
B-51 Y our J282 workstationâ s EISA Assembly has five slots. Four are EISA slots; of these, two are EISA-only and two are EISA/GSC slots. The bottom slot is GSC only . Y our J2240 workstationâ s PCI Assembly has five slots. All five slots support PCI cards. Three slots support 32âbit PCI and two support 64âbit PCI. T wo of the 64âbit slots and one of the 32âbit slots sup- port GSC. Slot 4 also optionally supports EISA. NOTICE: The 32âbit PCI slots expect 5.0V signalling, while the 64âbit PCI slots expect 3.3V signal- ling The graphics boards supported by your workstation provide: ⢠HP VISUALIZE EG- Fast 2D graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZE-8/24 Accelerated 8-plane or 24-plane graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZE-48 24/24 Image plane, 24âbit Z buffer ,3D graphics ⢠HP VISUALIZEâFX2, âFX4, âFX6 (J2240 only) NOTICE: Dual graphics boards take up two slots. Other graphics boards may take one, two or three slots. Figures Bâ31, Bâ32 and Bâ33 show the physical layout of the EISA/ GSC slots, first from outside the system unit, then from inside the PCI and EISA Assemblies. Installing an EISA, PCI or Graphics Board
B-52 4 3 2 1 0 graphics 2 graphics 3 graphics 1 graphics 0 Physical Slot Numbers On Outside of System Figur e Bâ31.EISA/PCI/GSC Slots from Outside the EISA/PCI Assem- bly Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 4 GSC Slots EISA Slots Bottom of EISA Assembly Slot Numbers on Board Figur e Bâ32.EISA/GSC Slots from Inside the J282 EISA Assembly
B-53 Figur e Bâ33.GSC/PCI/EISA Slots from inside the J2240 PCI Assem- bly Physical slot 0 is always reserved for graphics cards only . graphics0 Graphics device in slot 0. If using a Dual Graphics Card, this is the port to the right on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics1 Graphics device in slot 1. If using a Dual Graphics Card, this is the port to the right on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics2 Graphics device in slot 2. If there is a Dual Graphics Card in slot 1, this is the port to the left on the card when facing the back of the workstation. graphics3 This is a logical slot, and can only be reached by using the left port of a Dual Graphics Card in physical slot 0.
B-54 Follow these steps to install a PCI, EISA or graphics board into your workstation: 1. W orking from the rear of the workstation, unscrew the four cap- tive screws and pull the PCI/EISA Assembly straight out using the handle. See Figure Bâ34. Figur e Bâ34.Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly
B-55 Figur e Bâ35. PCI/EISA I/O Assembly
B-56 2. Rotate the unit 90 degrees clockwise and place on a flat surface, as shown in Figure Bâ36. Figur e Bâ36.Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly for Installation
B-57 3. Unscrew one screw at the back of the cover and lift the cover up and out to remove it from the PCI/EISA Assembly . See Figure Bâ37. Figur e Bâ37.Removing the PCI/EISA Assembly Cover
B-58 4. Unscrew one screw at the top of the slot cover and pull the cover straight up to remove it. See Figure Bâ38. Figur e Bâ38.Removing the PCI/EISA Slot Cover
B-59 5. Place PCI, GSC, or EISA board you are installing in the board guides and slide firmly into the connector . Check to see the board is evenly inserted to seat properly . See Figure Bâ39. Figur e Bâ39.Installing a PCI, GSC, or EISA or Graphics Board in the PCI/EISA Assembly 6. Secure board with one screw in top of board connector bracket.
B-60 7. (J2240 Only) Before installing cover , if you installed an EISA, or graphics board that is taller than a PCI card remove the small breakâoff block from the cover that corresponds to that slot. Re- fer to Figure Bâ40. Figur e Bâ40.Remove Block from PCI Assembly Cover
B-61 8. Insert cover in guide and secure with screw . Refer to Figure Bâ41. îî îîî Figur e Bâ41.Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly Cover
B-62 9. Rotate the unit back 90 degrees as shown in Figure Bâ42 and grasp the handle. Figur e Bâ42.Rotating the PCI/EISA Assembly Back
B-63 10. Slide the PCI/EISA Assembly into the system unit and secure it with the four captive screws. See Figure Bâ43. Figur e Bâ43.Replacing PCI/EISA Assembly
B-64 Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a spe- cific resolution and frequency . If you replace your monitor with a dif- ferent type, you must reconfigure your workstation to support it There are two ways to configure your workstation to support a differ- ent monitor type: Setting the Monitor T ype from the Boot Console Interface T o change your workstationâ s graphics parameters before you replace your monitor , go to âDisplaying and Setting the Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix D. Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On If you ⢠replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different monitor type, and ⢠do not set the workstationâ s graphics parameters by using the monitor command before doing so, then press Ta b after your keyboardâ s lights flash during the boot process to initiate the automatic monitor selection process. Y our system queries you for the new monitor type. Select the new type by pressing Enter . The system queries you to confirm your selection. Press y to save this monitor type. If you donât press y , the system cycles through the other monitor types, some of which your monitor wonât display . W ait for the workstation to display your monitor type again, then select it. Changing Y our Monitor T ype
B-65
C-1 Appendix C SCSI Connections ⢠SCSI bus differences ⢠SCSI restrictions ⢠Determining SCSI bus length ⢠Assigning SCSI device IDs ⢠Connecting to the SCSI ports
C-2 This appendix provides information about connecting Small Comput- er System Interface (SCSI) devices to an HP 9000 J282/2240 workstation. The instructions in this chapter assume you are using the HP-UX version 10.20 or later operating system with the HP VUE version 3.0 interface. NOTICE: When attaching external SCSI devices, be sure to terminate the last device on the external SCSI bus. If no external devices are attached, the SCSI connector on the rear of the system must be terminated with the terminator that was shipped with your workstation.
C-3 A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) bus is an IEEE standard bus for connecting your workstation to internal and external devices (SCSI devices) running at different speeds, singly or in combination. Examples of these SCSI devices are floppy disk drives, 4-mm DDS- format tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and W inchester hard disk drives. There are three types of SCSI buses available with this workstation â a narrow , single-ended (NSE) SCSI bus, a fast, wide differential (FWD) SCSI bus, and an ultraâfast, wide, singleâended (UWSE) SCSI bus. T able Câ1 shows the specification differences between these SCSI buses, and T able Câ2 shows the SCSI addresses, ID num- bers, and arbitration priorities for each. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, fast, wide differential or ultra, wide, singleâended devices on any one bus type. Doing this will cause a system failure. SCSI Bus Differences
C-4 T able Câ1. SCSI Bus Differ ences T ransfer Rate Data Bus Width Maximum Addresses* Maximum Cable Length Device Physical Location Controller Embedded or Plugable Narrow , Single- Ended up to 8 bits 8 6.0 meters internal and embedded up to 5 Mbytes per second (19.6 feet) external Fast, Wide Dif- ferential up to 16 bits 16 25 meters internal and embedded up to 20 Mbytes per second (82 feet) external Ultra, Wide SingleâEnded** up to 40 Mbytes per second 16 bits 16 3.0 meters (9.84 feet) internal and external embedded * Address 7 is reserved for host controller use on both buses. ** Only 2 external devices allowed (total of 4 devices).
C-5 T able Câ2. SCSI Bus Addr esses, ID Numbers, and Arbitration Priorities SCSIâ2 Address Priority SCSIâ2 ID Number 7 . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . 1 6 . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . 2 5 . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 3 4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . 4 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . 5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . 7 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 15 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 14 . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 13 . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 12 . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 1 1 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 10 . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 14 9 . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 15 8 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . 16 8âbit devices SCSIâ2 SingleâEnded 16âbit SCSIâ3 Fast, W ide or Ultra, devices 15 . . . . . . 8 7 . . . . . . 0 W ideâSE Bus
C-6 This section describes the SCSI restrictions that apply to your work- station in the following areas: ⢠Cables ⢠Connectors and terminator ⢠SCSI configuration constraints Cables All SCSI devices ship without cables. Only SCSI cables approved by HP can be used to connect your workstation and any SCSI devices. HP offers the following SCSI cables for narrow single-ended SCSI devices: ⢠K2296 cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠K2297 cable with 1.5 meter (5 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally con- nected devices to the system fast, wide differential port: ⢠C291 1A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length HP offers the following SCSI cables for connecting externally con- nected devices to the system ultra, wideâSE port: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length ⢠CXXXXA (p/n 5183â3710â.9) cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length CAUTION: SCSI cables approved by HP are designed to function within the SCSI tolerances for HP de- SCSI Restrictions
C-7 vices. Use of other cables can result in signifi- cant problems with system operation. Narrow singled-ended SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 6 meters (19.6 feet). Fast, wide differential SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 25 meters (82 feet). Ultra, wideâSE SCSI definition limits the total cable length of SCSI cables to 3 meters (9.84 feet). Always use the shortest possible cable(s) for your configuration. If you are daisy-chaining narrow single-ended SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠92222A cable with 0.5 meter (1.6 feet) length ⢠92222B cable with 1.0 meter (3.2 feet) length ⢠92222C cable with 2.0 meter (6.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining fast, wide differential SCSI devices togeth- er , use the following cables: ⢠C291 1A cable with 0.9 meter (3 feet) length ⢠C2924A cable with 2.5 meter (8.2 feet) length ⢠C2925A cable with 10.0 meter (32.8 feet) length ⢠C2926A cable with 20.0 meter (65.6 feet) length If you are daisy-chaining ultra, wideâSE SCSI devices together , use the following cables: ⢠C2978A cable with 0.5 meter (1.64 feet) length NOTICE: See âDetermining SCSI Bus Lengthâ later in this Appendix to determine the total length of your cables.
C-8 Connectors and T erminator Any narrow , single-ended SCSI device connecting to the system box must use a 50-pin high-density thumb screw connector on the end connecting to the system board, and a 50-pin low-density bail lock connector on the other end. If you attach a second SCSI device, the cable must have low-density connectors on each end. Any fast, wide differential or ultra, wideâSE SCSI device connecting to the system box must use a 68-pin high-density thumb screw con- nector on both ends. The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order terminator K2291 (for 50-pin connectors) or C2905A (for 68-pin fast, wide dif- ferential connectors) or C2972A (for 68-pin ultra, wideâSE connec- tors) from Hewlett-Packard. SCSI Configuration Constraints Y ou are limited to a certain number of same-type SCSI devices per system. Before adding another SCSI device, determine if the system can support the additional device. This workstation offers the following types of SCSI bus, each with its own configuration constraints: ⢠narrow , single-ended SCSI bus ⢠fast-wide, differential SCSI bus (J282 or J2240 upgrade) ⢠ultra, wideâsingleâended, SCSI bus (J2240 only) Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints For the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus, HP-UX supports only one of each type of removable disk drive and two of the same type tape de-
C-9 vices per system. T able Câ3 shows configuration constraints for each narrow , single-ended SCSI device type. If the system has internal hard disk drives or a floppy disk drive, you must count them as SCSI devices. T able Câ3. Narr ow Single-Ended SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Devices Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed Hard Disk Drives (internal and external) Floppy Disk Drives CD-ROM Drives 4-mm DDS T ape Drives (one internal) 9-track T ape Drives 650-MB Magneto-Optical Drives Magneto-Optical Autochangers (see notice below) Maximum Number of SCSI Devices 7 1 1 2 2 1 1 7 NOTICE: Magneto-Optical Autochangers use three SCSI-2 drive addresses. Each address must be accounted for in the maximum number of NSE SCSI devices allowed. CAUTION: Do not mix narrow single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus.
C-10 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Fast, wide differential SCSI does not work with the narrow , single-en- ded SCSI. T able Câ4 shows the configuration constraints for each fast, wide differential SCSI device type. T able Câ4. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints External Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Devices SCSI-3 Drive (fast, wide disk drives only) 15 SCSI-3 Disk Arrays (addressed as single drive) 7 Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed CAUTION: Do not mix narrow single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus. Ultra, Wide SingleâEnded SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints Ultra, wideâSE SCSI does not work with the narrow , single-ended SCSI or FWD SCSI. T able Câ5 shows the configuration constraints for each ultra, wideâSE SCSI device type. T able Câ5. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus Configuration Constraints External Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Devices Ultra, W ideâSE Drive (ultra, wide disk drives only) 2 Ultra, W ideâSE Disk Arrays (addressed as a single drive) 1 Maximum Number of Each T ype of Device Allowed CAUTION: Do not mix narrow , single-ended, ultra, wideâ SE and fast, wide differential SCSI peripherals together on the same bus.
C-1 1 This section helps you to determine the total length of the narrow , single-ended SCSI bus, the fast, wide differential SCSI bus and the ultra, wideâSE SCSI bus. Narrow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total narrow , single-ended SCSI bus length (including the system unit, external SCSI devices, and SCSI interconnect cables) using T able Câ6: 1. Find all of your external NSE SCSI devices in the first column. In the third column, write the NSE SCSI bus lengths (from the second column) that correspond to your devices. NOTICE: In the third column, the length for the System Unit is already listed. This number must always be used for the system unit. 2. In the fourth column, write down the lengths of the NSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the section on âSCSI Restrictions.â) 3. Add up all of the numbers in the third column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the fourth column. 4. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the narrow , single-ended standard SCSI bus must not exceed 6 meters (19.6 feet). If the number you write for T otal Determining SCSI Bus Length
C-12 NSE SCSI Bus Length is greater than 6 meters (19.6 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-13 T able Câ6. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Narr ow , Single-Ended SCSI Bus T otal NSE SCSI Bus Length = NSE SCSI Device Cable Length meters (feet) meters (feet) System Unit 7980S A1999A 0.3 (1.0) C1701C C1704C Internal NSE SCSI Bus Length Device Internal Length Subtotals: meters (feet) External C1520A C1521A C1700C C1705C C2213A 0.0 (0.0) 0.3 (1.0) (T otal NSE SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 6 meters [19.6 feet]) C2217T 1.7 (5.6) 1.7 (5.6) N/A 0.2 (0.7) 0.2 (0.7) 1.1 (3.6) 0.0 (0.0) 0.0 (0.0) 1.5 (4.9) 1.3 (4.3)
C-14 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total FWD SCSI bus length for the FWD SCSI- bus on your system using T able Câ7: 1. List all of your internal FWD SCSI devices in the first column. 2. In the second column, write the lengths of the internal FWD SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3. In the third column, write down the lengths of the FWD SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the âSCSI Restric- tionsâ section.) 4. Add up all of the numbers in the second column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the third column. 5. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the FWD SCSI bus must not exceed 25 meters (82 feet). If the number you write for T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length is greater than 25 meters (82 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-15 T able Câ7. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Bus T otal FWD SCSI Bus Length = FWD SCSI Device Internal FWD SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) C3034T C3035T C3036T meters (feet) Device Internal Length Cable Length meters (feet) External Subtotals: (T otal FWD SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 25 meters [82 feet]) System Unit N/A 1.7 (5.6) 1.0 (3.3) 1.0 (3.3) 1.0 (3.3)
C-16 Ultra, WideâSE SCSI Bus Length Follow these instructions to calculate your total UWSE SCSI bus length for the UWSE SCSI bus on your system using T able Câ8: 1. List all of your internal UWSE SCSI devices in the first column. 2. In the second column, write the lengths of the internal UWSE SCSI bus that correspond to your devices. 3. In the third column, write down the lengths of the UWSE SCSI interconnect cables you are using for your installation. (Cable lengths are listed in subsection âCablesâ in the âSCSI Restric- tionsâ section.) 4. Add up all of the numbers in the second column and write that number on the subtotal line at the bottom of the column. Do the same for the third column. 5. Add the subtotals together and write the total in the T otal SCSI Bus Length box. NOTICE: The total length of the UWSE SCSI bus must not exceed 3 meters (9.84 feet). If the number you write for T otal SCSI Bus Length is greater than 3 meters (9.84 feet), try configuring your installation with shorter cables. If you have problems, call your designated service representative.
C-17 T able Câ8. SCSI Bus Length W orksheet for Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Bus T otal UWSE SCSI Bus Length = SCSI Device Internal SCSI Bus Length meters (feet) C6390A meters (feet) Device Internal Length Cable Length meters (feet) External Subtotals: (T otal SCSI bus length not to exceed total of 3 meters [9.84 feet]) System Unit N/A 1.7 (5.6) 0.3 (1.0) 1.7 (5.6)
C-18 Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your existing SCSI device IDs. T o determine which SCSI device IDs are available for your device, use the ioscan command in a terminal window: 1. Click on the T erminal Control on the Front Panel of your W orkspace. T erminal Control A terminal window opens. 2. Move the mouse cursor into the terminal window and single- click the left mouse button. 3. Enter the following at the prompt: /usr/sbin/ioscan âf Enter After a few moments the ioscan utility lists all of the SCSI I/O devices it could find. The list appears similar to the following: Assigning SCSI Device IDs
C-19 Class I H/W Path Driver S/W State H/W Type Description ========================================================================== bc 0 root CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS bc 1 8 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter ext_bus 0 8/0 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC built-in Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 0 8/0.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 3 8/0.0.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE QUANTUM LPS1080WD target 1 8/0.5 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 2 8/0.5.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW target 2 8/0.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 0 8/0.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE DEC DSP3210SW ba 0 8/12 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter ext_bus 2 8/12/0 CentIf CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Parallel Interface audio 0 8/12/1 audio CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Audio tty 0 8/12/4 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ext_bus 1 8/12/5 c700 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in SCSI target 3 8/12/5.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 1 8/12/5.2.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-4101TA target 4 8/12/5.3 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE tape 0 8/12/5.3.0 stape CLAIMED DEVICE HP HP35480A target 5 8/12/5.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 10 8/12/5.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST3600N target 6 8/12/5.6 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 5 8/12/5.6.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE MICROP 2112 lan 0 8/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in LAN ps2 0 8/12/7 ps2 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in Keyboard/Mouse bc 2 10 ccio CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS I/O Adapter graphics 0 10/0 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics graphics 1 10/8 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ext_bus 3 10/12 c720 CLAIMED INTERFACE GSC add-on Fast/Wide SCSI Interface target 7 10/12.4 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 6 10/12.4.0 sdisk CLAIMED DEVICE SEAGATE ST31200W graphics 2 10/16 graph3 CLAIMED INTERFACE Graphics ba 1 10/20 bus_adapter CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS Core I/O Adapter hil 0 10/20/1 hil CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in HIL tty 1 10/20/2 asio0 CLAIMED INTERFACE Built-in RS-232C ba 2 10/20/5 eisa CLAIMED BUS_NEXUS EISA Bus Adapter ext_bus 4 10/20/5/3 hshpib CLAIMED INTERFACE EISA card HWP0C70 target 8 10/20/5/3.0 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 7 10/20/5/3.0.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 9 10/20/5/3.1 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 8 10/20/5/3.1.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 target 10 10/20/5/3.2 tgt CLAIMED DEVICE disk 9 10/20/5/3.2.0 cs80 CLAIMED DEVICE disk 07959 processor 0 32 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor processor 1 34 processor CLAIMED PROCESSOR Processor memory 0 49 memory CLAIMED MEMORY Memory
C-20 4. Y ou can determine which SCSI IDs are currently in use by look- ing under the H/W Path heading. The J2240 lists 8/4/19/0 as the built-in SCSI bus controller . For devices connected to the built- in SCSI bus, such as disks, the fourth number is the SCSI ID for that device. For example, the listing 8/4/19/0.6 .0 tells you that there is a SCSI device (a disk) currently using ID 6 on the SCSI bus. Narrow Single-Ended System SCSI Device IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check what SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ9: 1. W rite in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives in T able Câ9. 2. W rite in the type of external drives (single-ended standard, EISA, or fast, wide devices) currently connected to your system under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID Number .â 3. Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 4. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI addresses, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 4. Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou can use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the de- fault ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an exist-
C-21 ing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. See the drive installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device except the system card.
C-22 T able Câ9. Narr ow , Single-Ended SCSI Device IDs SCSI Device Drives Device ID (Address) Number (Only 0 through 6 A vailable) Internal External System SCSI Drive(s) Floppy Disk Drive (if present, uses ID No. 0) N/A N/A CDâROM Drive (if present, uses ID No. 2) N/A Internal System Drives: External Device Drives: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1st External Device 2nd External Device 3rd External Device 4th External Device 5th External Device 6th External Device 7th External Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 7 SCSI devices (internal and external) connected to the system. 4-mm DDS T ape Drive (if present, uses ID No. 1) 5. W rite in the SCSI device ID of any internal drives.
C-23 6. W rite in the type of external single-ended drives currently con- nected to your workstation under the heading âExternal Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDe- vice ID Number .â 7. Add your new drive to the table if it is an external device. If it is an internal drive, continue to Step 8. NOTICE: The C1700A Magneto-Optical Autochanger uses three SCSI IDs, and accounts for three of the seven devices allowed on the SCSI bus. 8. Check to see which SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 if they are not already in use. If the de- fault ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an exist- ing drive ID, you need to assign a new SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for infor- mation on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. It is reserved for the built-in SCSI bus controller .
C-24 Fast, Wide Differ ential SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ10: 1. W rite in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âFast, W ide Differential SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDe- vice ID Number .â 2. Add your new drive to the table. 3. Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide differential SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able Câ10. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Device IDs Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device 2nd Internal Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 15 SCSI devices connected to a FWD SCSI bus. Fast, W ide Differ ential SCSI Device Drives 6 5
C-25 Ultra, WideâSE SCSI IDs Before assigning a SCSI device ID to your drive, you need to check your SCSI device IDs. T o check which SCSI device IDs are available and assign an ID to your device, follow these instructions which use T able Câ1 1: 1. W rite in the type of internal drives currently connected to your system under the heading âUltra, W ide SCSI Device Drivesâ and each driveâ s SCSI device ID under the heading âDevice ID Num- ber .â 2. Add your new drive to the table. 3. Check to see what SCSI device IDs are not used. Y ou may use ID numbers 0 through 6 and 8 through 15 if they are not already in use. If the default ID on your drive does not conflict with any existing drive IDs, use that ID. If your default address conflicts with an existing drive ID, assign a new fast, wide SCSI device ID to your drive. Refer to the driveâ s installation documentation for information on changing the device ID. CAUTION: Do not use SCSI device ID 7 for any device. T able Câ1 1. Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Device IDs Device ID (Address) Number (ID 7 not available) 1st Internal Device 2nd Internal Device NOTICE: Y ou can have no more than 4 SCSI devices connected to an UWSE bus. 6 5 Ultra, W ide SingleâEnded Device Drives
C-26 This section describes how to connect to the system SCSI ports (nar- row single-ended, ultra, wideâSE and fast,wide differential). System SCSI Port Connection The system contains two (2) SCSI connectors: ⢠System Single-Ended SCSI-2 Connector ⢠System Fast, W ide Differential or Ultra, W ideâSE SCSI Con- nector Figure Câ1 shows the rear panel with terminators attached to the two SCSI connectors. Figure Câ2 shows the two SCSI connectors without terminators. SCSI cables connect to these ports with a high-density thumb screw connector . Connecting to the SCSI Ports
C-27 îîîî î îîîîîîîîîî Figur e Câ1. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors with T erminators Attached
C-28 Fast, Wide Differential or Ultra, Wide-SE SCSI Connector SingleÄEnded SCSIÄ2 Connector Figur e Câ2. Rear Panel SCSI Connectors without T erminators NOTICE: The last device connected to the SCSI bus must be terminated with a SCSI terminator . All of the devices listed ship without terminators. If you do not already have a SCSI terminator , you must order terminator K2291 (NSE), C2905A (FWD), or C2972A (UWSE) from Hewlett- Packard.
D-1 Appendix D The Boot Console Interface This appendix describes the different features of the boot console in- terface and how to use them. It presents the information in the follow- ing sections: ⢠Boot console interface features ⢠Accessing the boot console interface ⢠Booting your workstation ⢠Searching for bootable media ⢠Resetting your workstation ⢠Displaying and setting paths ⢠Displaying and setting the monitor type ⢠Displaying the current memory configuration ⢠Displaying the status of the System I/O ⢠Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search flags ⢠Displaying and setting the Security mode ⢠Displaying and setting the Fastboot mode ⢠Displaying the LAN station address ⢠Displaying system information ⢠Displaying PIM information
D-2 Boot Console Interface Features There are times when you want to interact directly with the hardware of your workstation before it boots the operating system. Y our workstation provides a menuâdriven boot console interface that al- lows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters, even if the operating system is unavailable. Here are some of the things you can do: ⢠Boot your workstation ⢠Search for bootable media ⢠Reset your workstation ⢠Display and set boot paths ⢠Display and set your monitor type ⢠Display memory configuration information ⢠Display the status of the EISA slots ⢠Set Auto Boot and Auto Search ⢠Set Fastboot· ⢠Display LAN information ⢠Display system information ⢠Display PIM information NOTICE: All of the tasks in the boot console interface should be performed by a system administrator . The boot console menus follow , showing the various tasks you can perform and the information available.
D-3 The shortened version of all commands is indicated by the uppercase letters. Help is available for all the menus and commands by using either help, he , or ? and the menu or command you want help on. ââââââ Main Menuââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââ âââââââââââ BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY][<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices COnfiguration [<command>] Access Configuration menu/commands INformation [<command>] Access Information menu/ commands SERvice [<command>] Access Service menu/ comands DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system Main Menu: Enter command > ââââââ
D-4 ââââââ Configuration Menuââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description ââââââââ âââââââââââ AUto [BOot|SEArch] [ON|OFF] Display or set specified auto flag BootID [<proc>] [<boot ID>] Display or modify processor boot ID BootINfo Display bootârelated in formation BootTimer [0 â 200] Seconds allowed for boot attempt CPUconfig {<proc>] [ON|OFF] Config/deconfig processor DEfault Set the system to predefined values FastBoot [ON|OFF] Display or set boot tests execution LanConfig Display or set LAN Configuration MOnitor [LIST|<path> <type>] Change the current moni tor type PAth [PRI|ALT|CON|KEY] [<path>] Display or modify a path SEArch [DIsplay|IPL] [<path>] Search for boot devices SECure [ON|OFF] Set/show security mode TIme [c:y:m:d:h:m:[s] Read or set real time clock in GMT BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command>] Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu
D-5 ââââââ Configuration Menu: Enter command > ââââââ Information Menu âââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââââââ âââââââââââ ALL Display all system information BootINfo Display bootârelated information CAche Display cache information ChipRevisions Display revisions of VLSI and firmware COprocessor Display coprocessor information FwrVersion Display firmware version IO Dispay I/O interface information LanAddress Display builtâin system LAN address MEmory Display memory information PRocessor Display processor information WArnings Display selftest warning messages BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ââââââ Information Menu: Enter command >
D-6 ââââââ Service Menu âââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ Command Description âââââââ âââââââââââ ChassisCodes [<proc>] Display chassis codes CLEARPIM Clear (zero) the contents of PIM EepromRead [<addr>] {<len>} Read EEPROM locations MemRead <addr> [<len>] [a] Read memory locations PDT [CLEAR] Display or clear the Page Deallocation Table PIM [<proc> [HPMC|LPMC|TOC]] Display PIM information BOot [PRI|ALT|<path>] Boot from specified path DIsplay Redisplay the current menu HElp [<menu>|<command> Display help for menu or command RESET Restart the system MAin Return to Main Menu ââââââ Service Menu: Enter command >
D-7 Accessing the Boot Console Interface T o access the boot console interface, follow these steps: NOTICE: This procedure should be done by a system ad- ministrator . 1. Close any files and applications on your workstation. 2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the system unit. NOTICE: There is no need to manually shut down the HPâUX operating system on your workstation before powering it off. When you turn of f the power switch, your workstation automatically shuts down the operating system before termi- nating the power . Make sure that you do not unplug the systemâ s power cord or other- wise interrupt power to the system unit at this time. 3. When the system has completely shut down, power on your workstation. If Autoboot is turned off, the boot sequence automatically stops at the bootconsole Main Menu. If Autoboot is turned on, you will see the following messages: Processor is starting Autoboot process. To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds. If Autoboot and Autosearch are both turned on, you will see the fol- lowing messages: Processor is booting from first available de- vice.To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds.
D-8 NOTICE: If you are using a powerâsaving monitor , you will have less than 10 seconds from the time this message appears to press a key . 4. Press a key . Y ou will then see the message: Boot terminated The Main Menu of the boot console appears.
D-9 Booting Y our W orkstation Usually , you start your workstation by turning it on and waiting for HPâUX to boot automatically . However , you may not always want the usual sequence to occur . For example, you may want to start your workstation from an operat- ing system that is stored on a device that is different from your usual boot device. If your normal operating system kernel or the disk on which it resides becomes damaged or unusable, you may wish to boot from a different disk or perhaps another type of device, such as a DDSâformat tape drive. Here are some situations and examples: ⢠If you know which device you want to boot from, and you know that it contains a bootable operating system, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device where device is the hardware path to the device, specified in Mne- monic Style Notation. For example, if you wish to boot an operating system that is stored on a DDSâformat tape in a drive that is located at â âsescsi.1.0â â, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following command at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot sescsi.1.0
D-10 ⢠If you do not know which device you want to boot from, then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch Path Number Device Path Device Type âââââââââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââââ P0 FWSCSI.6.0 HP C2490WD P1 SESCSI.1.0 HP HP35480A Main Menu: Enter command > Boot P1 The operating system on the specified device is used to start your workstation (also see; Sear ching for Bootable Media ). ⢠If you wish to interact with the Initial System Loader (ISL) be- fore booting your workstation, follow the directions in âAcces- sing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > boot device Y ou are prompted: Interact with ISL (Y,N,Q)> Answering yes ( Y) causes the ISL to be loaded from the specified device. After a short time, the following prompt appears on your screen: ISL> ISL is the program that actually controls the loading of the operating system. By interacting with ISL, you can choose to load an alternate version of the HPâUX operating system. If you do not want ISL to be loaded, you must enter N. For example, if the usual kernel ( /stand/vmunix ) on your root disk ( fwscsi.6.0 ) has become corrupted, and you wish to boot your workstation from the backup kernel ( /stand/vmunix.prev ), type the following at the ISL> prompt:
D-1 1 ISL> hpux /stand/vmunix.prev ⢠If you do not know which media in your file systems have boot- able operating systems, you can find them with the search IPL command.
D-12 Searching for Bootable Media T o list devices that contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch ipl The search command searches all buses. The search may turn up more devices than there are lines on your display . If you are using a text terminal, you may control the progress of the search from your terminalâ s keyboard by performing the following steps: ⢠T o hold the display temporarily , press Ctrl S. ⢠T o continue the display , press Ctrl Q . ⢠T o halt the search, press any other key These flowâcontrol commands do not work with a bitmapped display , but such a display can show more than forty lines of text, so you are unlikely to need them. T o search for devices of just one type that actually contain bootable media, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > sear ch ipl device_type where device_type is one of the following: fwscsi is the builtâin fast, wide SCSI bus. sescsi is the builtâin singleâended SCSI bus. lan is all connections to the builtâin LAN. gsc n is an optional fast, wide SCSI interface in slot number n.
D-13 Resetting Y our W orkstation T o reset your workstation to its predefined values, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix, and then type the following at the prompt to access the Configu- ration Menu: Main Menu: Enter command > co When the Configuration Menu appears, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > default
D-14 Displaying and Setting Paths A path is the hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. The path command sets the system paths shown in T able Dâ1. The path command sets and displays the hardware address of a speci- fied device attached to the I/O bus of your workstation. T able Dâ1. System Paths Path T ype Device primary or pri Y our workstationâ s default boot device (usually the root disk) alternate or alt Y our workstationâ s alternate boot device (usual- ly a DDSâformat tape device) console or cone Y our workstationâ s primary display device keyboard or key Y our workstatonâ s primary input ASCII device T o display the current settings for the system paths, type the follow- ing at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path The paths are displayed in Mnemonic Style Notation, as shown in T able Dâ2. T able Dâ2. Mnemonic Style Notation for Boot Paths I/O T ype Specification Format Builtâin FWSCSI core.fwscsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number slot n.fwscsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number Builtâin SCSI core.scsi. scsi_addr ess.logical_unit_number Builtâin LAN core.lan. server_addr ess.init_timeout.io_time- out
D-15 T o display the current setting for a particular system path, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able Dâ1. For example, to get the path to the primary boot device, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path primary T o set a system path to a new value, follow the directions in âAcces- sing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this chapter , and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path path_type path where path_type is one of the path types listed in T able Dâ1 and path is the specification of the path in Mnemonic Style Notation (as de- scribed in T able Dâ2). For example, to set the primary boot path to a SCSI disk with an ID of 6.0, follow the directions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appendix, and then type the following at the prompt: Main Menu: Enter command > path pri sescsi.6.0
D-16 Displaying and Setting the Monitor T ype Y our system ships from the factory preset to use a monitor with a spe- cific resolution and frequency . If you replace your workstationâ s mon- itor with a different type of monitor , you must reconfigure your workstation to support the new monitor . The Monitor Command The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics configuration. This command is available in Configuration Menu of the boot console interface. NOTICE: The monitor command lets you change your workstationâ s graphics configuration before you replace your monitor . For information about changing the configuration after you replace your monitor , refer to âChanging Y our Monitor T ypeâ in Appendix B. T o display the current graphics and console information, enter the following command; Main Menu: Enter command > co Configuration: Enter command > mo The correct usage for setting the graphics configuration is: mo graphics_path type where valid graphics_path parameters are:
D-17 graphics(0) through graphics(2) â Graphics adapters installed in op- tion slots 0 through 2 and type is the numerical monitor type. For example, a Dual V isualize Enhanced Graphics Card (A4451A) installed in option slot 2 would be graphics(2A) and graphics(2B).
D-18 Displaying the Current Monitor Configuration T o display the current monitor configuration for your system from the Configuration Menu of the boot console interface, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, enter: Main Menu: Enter command > configuration This places you in the Configuration Menu. From here, enter: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor The screen displays a list of the current graphics adapters and there monitor types configured for your workstation. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class âââââââââ ââââ ââââ ââââââ âââââââââââ ââââ âââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(1) 1 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 12 Configuration Menu: Enter command > In this example, only the graphics adapter(located in slot 1) graph- ics(1) is configured. The monitor type for graphics(1) is set to type 12, which is a 1280 by 1024 monitor that uses a frequency of 72 Hz.
D-19 Setting the Monitor T ype Y ou can set the monitor type for a graphics adapter by entering the following: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics( n) tt Where n is the number of the graphics adapter and tt is the monitor type. T o display a list of supported monitors, enter the following command: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor list A list of valid monitor types similar to the following is displayed: MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class ââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââââââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 1 1280x1024 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 2 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 3 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 4 1280x1024 75Hz VESA,Double buffered,Greyscale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 5 1024x768 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 6 800x600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 7 640x480 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 8 1600x1200 75Hz VESA
D-20 GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 9 1600x1200 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 10 1200x1600 75Hz VESA GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 11 1200x1600 75Hz VESA,Grey scale GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 12 1280x1024 72Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 13 1280x1024 72Hz Double buff ered GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 14 640x480 60Hz GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 15 ââââââââuser definedâââââââ Configuration Menu: Enter command >
D-21 T o set the monitor type for graphics(0) to monitor type 2, enter the following: Configuration Menu: Enter command > monitor graphics(0) 2 This will take effect on the next reboot. MONITOR INFORMATION Path Slot Head HPA Resolution Freq Type Class âââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(0) 0 1 f8000000 1280x1024 72Hz 2 The boot console displays a message that tells you that your new monitor selection will take affect the next time you reboot your sys- tem. The boot console also displays the new monitor information. T rying to change the monitor type to a number not listed for that graphics device fails and gives you the following warning message: Value of monitor type n out of range (n â nn) T rying to change the monitor type on an empty slot fails and gives you the following warning message: No such graphics card.
D-22 Setting the Monitor T ype at Power On If you replace your workstationâ s monitor with a different monitor type, and do not set the workstationâ s graphics parameters by using the monitor command before doing so, you need to perform the fol- lowing: W ait two seconds after the Num Lock light flashes near the end of the boot sequence, then press T ab to initiate the automatic monitor selec- tion process. NOTICE: It takes approximately one to two minutes after powering on the workstation before the Num Lock light flashes. The system cycles through all of the available monitor types one at a time. When you can see a message similar to the following clearly and legibly , select that monitor type by pressing Enter: Path Slot Head Type Size Freq Class âââââ âââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââââ GRAPHICS(1) 1 1 n nnnnxnnnn nnHz Press [RETURN] to select this monitor type (type n of n types). The system queries you to confirm your selection. Press Y to save this monitor type. If you press any key other than Y , the following message is displayed: Monitor type not saved. At this point, the new monitor type is active, but not saved. Because you didnât save the monitor type, the next time you reboot the system the original monitor type will be used. Next, the following message is displayed:
D-23 To select a new Graphics Monitor Type press the <TAB> key now, otherwise EXIT by entering any other key (or will time out in 15 se- conds)... To restart the monitor selection process, press TAB. Changing the Console to External T erminal In the event that your console stops displaying to your graphics de- vice, use the following procedure to display the console to an external terminal: 1. T urn system power off. 2. Disconnect the PC keyboard connector from the system rear panel. 3. Connect a serial terminal to the Serial 1 connector (the left serial connector) on the system rear panel (PCI/EISA as- sembly). 4. Power on the system. The system will now display the console to the terminal connected to the Serial 1 port.
D-24 Displaying the Current Memory Configuration The following sample screen output using the memory command shows: first, a memory configuration table with properlyâinstalled and configured memory (Sample Output 1); and second, output when a DIMM has been improperly installed (Sample Output 2). T o display the current memory configuration for your system, from the Information Menu of the boot console interface, follow the direc- tions in âAccessing the Boot Console Interfaceâ earlier in this appen- dix. Once you are in the Boot Console Interface Main Menu, type: Main Menu: Enter command > information This places you in the Information Menu. From here type: Information Menu: Enter command > memory The screen displays status and configuration information for the memory DIMMs installed in your workstation. The first listing below shows the memory information for a system with correctly installed and configured memory modules. The second listing shows the in- formation for a system that has memory modules incorrectly installed or configured.
D-25 Memory Information Sample 1 The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are properly installed and configured: MEMORY INFORMATION MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ââââ âââââââââ ââââââ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b 32MB Configured 2a/b 128MB Configured âââââââââ TOTAL 224MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot âââ âââââ âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââ ââââ 0x00000000 1 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0x0c000000 0 2 Configured 0 Configured 16MB 1a/b 2 Configured 2 Configured 16MB 1a/b Group 1 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 2 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE
D-26 SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââ ââââ 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 234881024 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) â 0 ââââââââââ Available Memory (bytes) : 234881024 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION ââââââââ ââââââââââ 0x0710 0x0900
D-27 Memory Information Sample 2 The following sample shows the memory information when memory modules are not properly installed and configured. In this sample the memory module in memory slot 1A is missing. MEMORY INFORMATION WARNING: Memory has been reconfigured due to a physical change or because the Page Deallocation Table (PDT) was cleared. This is for information only. No action is re- quired. MEMORY STATUS TABLE Slot Size(a b) Status ââââ âââââââââ ââââââ 0a/b 64MB Configured 1a/b ??MB SIMM not seated properly. 2a/b 128MB Configured âââââââââ TOTAL 192MB DETAILED MEMORY CONFIGURATION TABLE SPA GROUP SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status Size Slot âââ âââââ âââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââââââââ ââââ ââââ 0x00000000 0 0 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b 0 Configured 3 Configured 64MB 0a/b 1 Configured 1 Configured 64MB 2a/b Group 0 interleaved 2 ways over 3 banks BAD MEMORY TABLE
D-28 SMC SMC Status Bank Bank Status SIMM Size Slot âââ ââââââââââ ââââ âââââââââââ âââââââââ ââââ 0 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 1 Present 0 Not Present 0MB 5a/b 2 Not Present 0MB 4a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 0a/b 2 Present 0 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 1 Not Present 0MB 3a/b 2 Sizing Error 0MB 1a/b 3 Not Present 0MB 3a/b Active, installed memory (bytes) : 201326592 of Standard DRAM Deallocated pages (bytes) â 0 âââââââââââ Available Memory (bytes) : 201326592 Good Memory Required by OS (bytes): 0 (Not Set by OS) Memory HVERSION SVERSION ââââââââ ââââââââââ 0x0710 0x0900
D-29 Displaying the Status of the System I/O The IO command lets you identify all builtâin I/O devices and option- al I/O devices installed in the option slots. It is available in the In- formation Menu. T o use the IO command from the Information Menu of the boot con- sole interface, type: Information Menu: Enter command > IO Information about the builtâin and optional I/O devices is displayed. I/O MODULE INFORMATION IODC IODC Path Decimal Type Location HVER SVER Vers Dep ââââ ââââââââ ââââ ââââââââ ââââ ââââ ââââ âââ 8/0 8/0 Bus Bridge builtâin 6800 0a00 0x00 0x00 FWSCSI 8/12 A DMA I/O builtâin 03b0 8980 0x96 0x00 8/16 8/16 Bus Adapter builtâin 03b0 8100 0x00 0x00 8/16/0 8/16/0 Parallel builtâin 03b0 7400 0x00 0x00 8/16/1 8/16/1 Audio builtâin 03b4 7b00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_1 8/16/4 RS232 builtâin 03b0 8c00 0x01 0x00 SESCSI 8/16/5 SE SCSI builtâin 03b0 8200 0x96 0x00 LAN 8/16/6 LAN builtâin 03b0 8a00 0x02 0x00 PS2 8/16/7 Keyboard builtâin 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00 8/16/8 8/16/8 Mouse builtâin 03b0 8400 0x00 0x00
D-30 8/16/10 8/16/10 Floppy builtâin 03b0 8300 0x00 0x00 8/20 8/20 Bus Adapter builtâin 0170 8e00 0x00 0x00 SERIAL_2 8/20/2 RS232 Port builtâin 0170 8c00 0x00 0x00 EISA 8/20/5 Bus Adapter builtâin 0170 9000 0x00 0x00 GRAPHICS(0) 8/24 INTERNAL_EG_X128 builtâin 0160 8500 0x01 0x00 8/63 8/63 Bus Converter builtâin 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 10/63 10/63 Bus Converter builtâin 5011 0c00 0x00 0x00 EISA Cards Path Type EISA ID ââââ ââââ âââââââ 8/20/5/1 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/2 EISA slot is empty 8/20/5/3 EISA slot is empty PCI Cards Slot Path Bus Class ââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââââ
D-31 Setting the Auto Boot and Auto Search Flags auto boot and auto search are variables stored in your workstationâ s nonvolatile memory . (Nonvolatile memory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset these flags to new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. auto boot boots the operating system whenever your workstation is turned on. T o examine the state of the auto boot and auto search flags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto If auto boot is set to on , your workstation automatically attempts to boot the operating system when turned on. If auto boot is set to off, your workstation enters the boot administration mode of the boot con- sole user interface. The state of the auto search flag determines how your workstation seeks a boot device during autoboot. If auto search is set to on , your workstation will search for other boot devices if the primary boot de- vice is not available. If auto search is off, your workstation will de- fault to the boot administration mode if it canât see the primary boot device. T o change the state of the auto boot or auto sear ch flags, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto boot state or Configuration Menu: Enter command > auto search state where state is on or off .
D-32 Autosearch searches for devices in the following order: Primary boot path Alternate boot path Builtâin fast, wide SCSI devices Builtâin singleâended SCSI devices Builtâin LAN bootp servers NOTICE: Fast wide SCSI adapter option cards installed in the option slots are not searched unless they are referenced by the primary or alternate boot paths. EISA cards are not searched.
D-33 Displaying and Setting the Security Mode The SECure flag is a variable stored in nonâvolatile memory . (Nonâ volitalmemory retains its contents even after power is turned off.) If you reset this flag to a new value, the change takes effect the next time you reboot the workstation. When the SECure flag is set to on, autoboot and autosearch are enabled and cannot be stopped. The system boots from the default boot paths regardless of user intervention. T o display the current setting for the SECure flag , enter the follow- ing command: secure T o set the SECure flag on or off , enter one of the following: secure on secure off
D-34 Displaying and Setting the Fastboot Mode When fastboot is enabled (set to on ), your workstation does a quick check of the memory and skips I/O interface testing during its powerâ on self tests. This enables your workstation to complete its boot pro- cess quicker . The default factory setting is for fastboot to be enabled ( on). The fastboot mode allows your workstation to boot quickly by per- forming a less extensive check of the systemâ s memory . When fastboot is disabled (set to off ), more extensive memory test- ing and I/O interface testing is performed during the self tests, caus- ing the boot process to take longer . If you are experiencing difficulty in booting your workstation, set fastboot to off and reboot the system. The more extensive testing may reveal the error condition. T o display the status of fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot T o disable fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot off T o enable fastboot , type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > fastboot on
D-35 Displaying the LAN Station Address It is sometimes necessary to supply a LAN station address of your workstation to other users. For example, if your workstation is to be- come a member of a cluster , the cluster administrator needs to know your LAN station address in order to add your workstation to the cluster . A LAN station address of your workstation is the label that uniquely identifies the LAN connection for your workstation at the link level (the hardware level). T o display your workstationâ s LAN station addresses, type the follow- ing at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > lanaddress The LAN station address is displayed as a twelveâdigit number in hexadecimal notation, similar to the following: LAN Station Addresses: 080009â789abc The address is for the systemâ s builtâin LAN. Configure and Display LAN Settings (J2240 Only) The LanConfig command configures and displays the current LAN settings. The hardware system supports 10BaseâT , 100BaseâT and AUI standards. T o automatically select the network speed (100 Mbits/sec) and data transfer operation (full or half duplex), operating in compliance with IEEE 802.3u, (this is the default and recommended setting) type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUTO T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Half_dx
D-36 T o select 10 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 10/Full_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and half duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Half_dx T o select 100 Mbits/sec network speed and full duplex mode, type the following at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig 100/Full_dx T o select the AUI port (10 Mbits/sec, half duplex only), type the fol- lowing at the prompt: Configuration Menu: Enter command > LanConfig AUI NOTICE: The LAN setting defaults to LANâTP(RJ45). If that setting fails, the system tries the LANâAUI setting. Also note that the new lan configura- tion settings take effect at the next BOot or SEArch command. Displaying System Information The all command allows you to display the systemâ s processor revi- sion and speed, cache size, memory size, flag settings, and the boot and console paths. T o display system information from the Informa- tion Menu, type the following at the prompt: Information Menu: Enter command > all This information is paged to allow you to view it as necessary .
D-37 Displaying PIM Information The pim command allows you to display the most recent PIM in- formation for the specified fault type. T o display PIM information for a specific fault, from the Service Menu, type the following at the prompt: Service Menu: Enter command > pim pr ocessor_number Y ou can use pim in the following ways: pim â gives all fault types pim 0 â HPMC information on processor pim 0 fault_type â fault type information on processor
GL-1 Glossary absolute pathname The full pathname of a file, including all the directories leading to it, starting with the root directory (â/â) and ending with the filename it- self. See also file , filename , pathname . access permissions Settings that allow a user or group of users to read, write, or execute files. See also file access permissions . active window The window that is receiving input from the keyboard at the present time. If there is no active window , anything you type is lost. Only one window can be active at a time. The active window is said to have the âkeyboard focus.â ANSI The American National Standards Institute, a nonâprofit organization, made up of various expert committees, that publishes standards for use by national industries. ANSI has adopted the IEEE standards for local area networks. argument The part of a command line that identifies the file or directory to be acted on.
GL-2 attachment unit interface (AUI) A transceiver cable that conforms to IEEE 802.3 specifications. back up v . T o make a copy of the file system on a tape or disk that can be stored separately from the original files. Also called âbacking up the systemâ or simply âsystem backup.â bitmap Generally speaking, an array of data bits used for graphic images. Strictly speaking, a pixmap of depth one, capable of representing 2âcolor images. boot Short for bootstrap service . A service provided by a short program, stored in the readâonly memory of your workstation, that loads the operating system (or any complex program) into main memory . Part- ner workstations provide bootstrap service to diskless workstations. See also boot ROM . boot console interface The interactive program that enables you to interact with the hard- ware of your workstation before the workstation boots the operating system. The boot console interface allows you to perform special tasks, display information, and set certain system parameters. boot ROM A readâonly memory that is incorporated into a workstation for the purpose of starting the operating system, testing the terminal, and pro- ducing a standard display .
GL-3 bootstrap service See boot . byte A fundamental characterâcode unit, usually consisting of 8 bits. CDâROM Compact Disc ReadâOnly Memory . See also CDâROM disc, CDâ ROM drive . CDâROM disc CDâROM discs are identical to the audio compact discs (CDs) used to record stereo music, except that they store data. CDâROM discs are 120 mm (4.7 inches) in diameter , and use one data surface with a capacity of 600 MB. The data surface contains pits and flat spots ar- ranged in a continuous spiral track, which is read at a constant speed. CDâROM drive A randomâaccess, readâonly , massâstorage device that uses remov- able CDâROM discs. The drive contains a semiconductor laser for reading data optically and an embedded controller with a SCSI inter- face. Central Processing Unit (CPU) The part of a workstation that interprets and executes instructions. child directory See subdirectory .
GL-4 click T o press and r elease a mouse button. The term comes from the fact that pressing and releasing most mouse buttons makes a clicking sound. cluster A group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server , performs as a fileâsystem server for the cluster clients. See also cluster client, cluster node, cluster server . cluster client A cluster node that does not have a local HPâUX file system. Its file system resides on the cluster server . See also cluster , cluster node , cluster server . cluster node A member of a group of workstations connected via a Local Area Network (LAN). One workstation, the cluster server , performs as a server to the cluster . See also cluster, cluster client, cluster server . cluster server A workstation that provides file access, login access, file transfer , printing, and other services across a network to a defined cluster of systems (cluster nodes) connected via a LAN. See also cluster , clus- ter client , cluster node , host . command An instruction that you enter into the system at a prompt, to execute a program or perform a task. See also shell command.
GL-5 command argument Information you provide on a command line to describe the object (usually a file or directory) to be operated on by the command. command interpreter A program that reads lines of text from standard input (typed at the keyboard or read from a file) and interprets them as requests to execute other programs. An HPâUX command interpreter is called a shell. See also shell. command option Information you provide on a command line to indicate any special action you want the command to take. See also default . configuration The arrangement of a workstation or network as defined by the na- ture, number , and chief characteristics of its functional units. More specifically , the term configuration may refer to a hardware configu- ration or a software configuration. control key sequence A keystroke combination used as a shorthand way of specifying com- mands. T o enter a control key sequence, you hold down the control key while pressing another key . cpu See Central Processing Unit . current dir ectory See current working dir ectory .
GL-6 current session The work and processes that have been created since you logged into the system (and before you log out again). See also session . current working dir ectory The directory in which a relative path name search begins, as well as the directory in which you are currently working. It is also called the working directory or current directory . cursor The small blinking box displayed in whatever screen is active at a particular time. The cursor marks your current typing position on the screen and indicates which program (HP VUE terminal window or shell) will receive your commands. daisyâchaining A method of connecting devices where the signal passes from one device to the next in serial fashion along a bus. DDS tape drive A device that stores data on Digital Data Storage (DDS) cassettes. default Most commands give you a choice of one or more options. If you donât specify an option, the command automatically assigns one. This automatic option is called the default. See also command option . dialog box A special type of HP VUE screen that is called by the user from a window . Dialog boxes contain controls and settings. T o display an example of a dialog box, click the Style Manager button on the W ork- space, then click on Color .
GL-7 directory A special type of object that contains information about the objects beneath it in the HPâUX organizational structure. Basically , it is a file that stores names and links to files and other directories. See also file. disk A thin, round plate with a magnetic surface coating on which data is stored by magnetic recording. See also floppy diskette , hard disk, CDâROM disc . disked workstation A workstation that has its own hard disk drive. See also diskless workstation , node , partner node , workstation . diskette See floppy diskette . diskless booting Loading the operating system into local memory from the disk of a partner workstation. diskless workstation A workstation that has no disk. A diskless workstation can use the disk of its partner workstation or other workstations. If necessary , it can also use the computational services of the partner workstation or other workstations. A diskless workstation boots from its partner workstation. See also disked workstation , node , partner node, workstation .
GL-8 double click T o press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession. drag T o press and hold down a mouse button while moving the mouse (and the pointer on the screen). See also drop. drive See CDâROM drive , DDS tape drive , floppy drive , hard disk drive . drop T o release an icon that has been âdraggedâ to a new position. See also drag . environment The conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your workstation characteristics, home directory , and default search paths. See also environment variables . environment variables The set of defined shell variables (some of which are P A TH, TERM, SHELL, EXINIT , HOME) that define the conditions under which your commands are executed. These conditions include your worksta- tion characteristics, home directory , and default search paths. See also environment . ETHERNET The LAN developed jointly by Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation, upon which the IEEE 802.3 network is based.
GL-9 Extended Industry Standard Architectur e (EISA) An industry standard bus architecture based on and compatible with that used by IBM in their A T series computers. fast, wide SCSI A 16âbit wide bus with highâpower receivers and drivers, which al- lows a cable length of up to 25 meters and a speed of up to 20 MB per second. See also singleâended standard SCSI, Small Computer System Interface . file The basic named unit of data stored on disk. See also directory , file- name . file access permissions The access rights given to a particular file or directory . Every file and directory has a set of access permissions, a code that determines whether a process can perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening the file or writing to it). See also access permissions . File Manager The HP VUE application that allows you to manage your files and directories, and to set viewing preferences. filename The name given to a particular file. See also absolute pathname , file , pathname . file server A workstation whose primary task is to control the storage and re- trieval of data from hard disks. Any number of other workstations can be linked to the file server in order to use it to access data.
GL-10 file system The organized set of files and directories on a hard disk. floppy diskette A thin, recordâshaped plate that stores data on its magnetic surfaces. The system uses heads (similar to heads in tape recorders) to read and write data on concentric disk tracks. floppy drive A device that stores data on a flexible diskette. hard disk A type of disk that is rigid as opposed to a floppy diskette, which is flexible. hard disk drive A device that stores data on a hard disk. The hard disk is a permanent part of the drive and cannot be removed. Help Manager The HP VUE application that provides online help. $HOME The environment variable representing the home directory . This is the directory in which you are placed after you log in. T ypically , this is /users/ login , where login is your username. See also home dir ec- tory .
GL-1 1 home directory A shorthand way of referring to a frequently used directory , almost always the login directory . host See cluster server . host name See internet protocol addr ess . HPâUX cluster See cluster node , cluster server . HP V isual User Environment A user interface that draws a graphical layer over the complexities of the other layers of the system (the hardware, operating system, and X W indow system), enabling you to control your workstation by direct- ly manipulating graphical objects instead of by typing commands at a commandâline prompt. HP VUE See HP V isual User Environment . icon A small, graphic representation of an object. Objects can be âico- nizedâ (turned into icons) to clear a cluttered workspace. Icons can be restored to their original appearance when needed. Whatever pro- cesses are executing in an object continue to execute when the object is iconized.
GL-12 iconify See iconize. iconize T o turn a window or shell into an icon. See also icon . Initial System Loader The program that actually controls the loading of the operating sys- tem. input device Any of several pieces of hardware equipment used to give informa- tion to a system. Examples are the keyboard and the mouse. See also output device . input window The window that displays a programâ s prompt and any commands typed but not yet executed. internet protocol addr ess (IP address) A string of characters that uniquely identifies a workstation in a net- work. Also referred to as the IP address, the system name, and the host name. invisible filename A filename in which the first character is a dot (.). Invisible filenames are not displayed by the listing commands such as ls and ll without add options, such as âa.
GL-13 IP address See internet protocol addr ess . ISL See Initial System Loader . kernel The part of the operating system that is an executable piece of code responsible for managing the computer â s resources. The kernel con- trols the rest of the operating system. LAN See local area network. LAN station address See local area network station addr ess . link n. A special object that contains the name of another object. When you specify a link as a pathname or part of a pathname, the system substitutes the pathname that the link contains. v . T o join together two or more objects. local ar ea network (LAN) A data communications system that allows a number of independent devices to communicate with each other . The systems and clusters that share data, hardware, and software resources via Networking Ser- vices software.
GL-14 local ar ea network station address The label that uniquely identifies the local area network (LAN) con- nection for your workstation at the hardware level. log in T o initially sign on to the system so that you may begin to use it. This creates your first user process. See also username. login directory The directory in which you are placed when you log in, usually your home directory . See also home directory . Login Manager The program that controls the initial startup of HP VUE and accepts the user â s username and password. login script The shell program that runs at each login, and sets the login environ- ment for your system. menu bar An area at the top or bottom of a window that contain the titles of the pullâdown or popâup menus for that application. minimize button In HP VUE, a push button on the window frame that turns a screen into an icon. See also icon, iconize.
GL-15 mouse pointer See pointer . name A character string associated with a file, directory , or link. A name can include various alphanumeric characters, but never a slash (/) or null character . See also pathname. network T wo or more workstations sharing information. See also cluster , workstation . network controller A printed circuit board that passes bit streams between the network and the main memory of the workstation. Coupled with the network transceiver , the controller also handles signal processing, encoding, and network media access. node A network computer (workstation). Each node in the network can use the data, programs, and devices of other network nodes. Each node contains main memory and has its own disk or shares one with anoth- er node. See also disked workstation, diskless workstation , workstation . node name A unique identifying name given to a workstation in a cluster . See also cluster , node .
GL-16 nonvolatile memory System memory that retains its contents even after workstation power is turned off. object Any file, directory , or link in the network. See also directory , file, link , pathname . operating system The program that supervises the execution of other programs on your workstation. For example, the entire HPâUX system, including the kernel and all HPâUX commands. See also kernel. option See command option . output device Any of several pieces of hardware used for receiving messages from the workstation. Display screens and printers are examples of output devices. See also input device . output window The window that displays a process response to your command. parent dir ectory A directory that contains other directories, each of which is then called a subdirectory . See also subdirectory .
GL-17 partner node A workstation that shares its disk with a diskless node. See also disk- less workstation . password The word you enter next to the password prompt at login time. Keep your password secret and change it occasionally in order to protect your account from unauthorized use. See also user account . path The hardware address of a device that is attached to the I/O system of your workstation. pathname A series of names separated by slashes that describe the path of the operating system from some starting point in the network to a destina- tion object. Pathnames begin with the name of the starting point, and include every directory name between the starting point and the des- tination object. A pathname ends with the name of the destination ob- ject. See also name, object . permissions A set of rights (read, write, execute) associated with an object in the file system. Determines who may use the object. PID Process Identification. Also referred to as a process ID. See also pro- cess ID .
GL-18 pointer Sometimes called the âmouse pointer ,â the pointer shows the mouse location on the screen. The pointer â s shape depends on its location. In the HP VUE W orkspace, the pointer is an X. On a window frame, the pointer is an arrow . process A computing environment in which you may execute programs; a program currently running in the system. process ID A unique identification number assigned to all processes by the oper- ating system. Also referred to as a PID. See also PID. program A unit of executable code, in binary or âsourceâ form. Most HPâUX commands and routines consist of programs. prompt A message or symbol displayed by the system to let you know that it is ready for your input. push button A graphic control that simulates a realâlife push button. Use the pointer and mouse to push the button and immediately start an action. RAM Random access memory .
GL-19 ROM Readâonly memory . root See superuser . scr oll bar A vertical or horizontal bar located on the side or bottom of a window that allows the user to view information that does not fit within the window . SCSI See Small Computer System Interface . server A program that controls all access to input and output devices. session The time between when you log in and when you log out. Also called a work session or a login session. See also current session . shell A commandâline interpreter program used to invoke utility programs. Some examples of HPâUX shells are the Bourne, Korn, Key , and C shells. Sometimes referred to as a command interpreter . See also command interpreter . shell command An instruction you give the system to execute a utility program or shell script. See also shell script , utility program .
GL-20 shell script A file that contains commands that the system can interpret and run in a shell. shutdown The process of taking the system from multiâuser state to system ad- ministration state. SIMM See Single Inâline Memory Module . singleâended standard SCSI An 8âbit wide SCSI bus with standard receivers and drivers, which limits total cable length to 6 meters. See also fast, wide SCSI , Small Computer System Interface . Single Inâline Memory Module A memory board. slider One of the components of a scroll bar . The slider is the object that is dragged along the scroll area to cause a change. Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) An IEEE standard for interfacing a computer to multiple, disparate highâspeed peripherals such as a floppy disk or a CDâROM, singly or in combination. See also fast, wide SCSI, singleâended standard SCSI .
GL-21 standalone A workstation that is not part of a cluster . See also cluster . Style Manager The HP VUE application that provides the ability to customize vari- ous aspects of your system, including colors, fonts, the keyboard, the mouse, session startup and termination behavior , and access to other workstations. subdirectory A directory that is located in, or anywhere on a path below , another directory . The directory above the subdirectory is called the parent directory . The subdirectory is also referred to as the child directory . See also parent dir ectory . superuser A user with permission to enter the topâlevel directory and make changes to files and programs that users are not allowed to change. T o âbecome superuserâ or âbecome rootâ means to let the system know that you are now assuming the role of system administrator . Y ou can do this either by logging into the system as root , or by typing su at a commandâline prompt. Y ou must know the root password to become root . system administrator The person responsible for system and network installation, updating, maintenance, and security at your site. system call Invocation of a kernel process by a user program.
GL-22 system name See internet protocol addr ess . terminal window A terminal window is a type of HP VUE window that emulates a complete display terminal. T erminal windows are typically used to fool nonâclient programs into believing they are running in their fa- vorite terminal. When not running programs or executing operating system commands, terminal windows display the commandâline prompt. See also HP Visual User Envir onment . title bar The rectangular area between the top of the window and the window frame, that contains the title of the window object. transceiver A device that transmits and receives signals. user account The system administrator defines a user account for every person au- thorized to use the system. Each user account contains the name the computer uses to identify the person (user ID), and the personâ s pass- word. User accounts also contain project and organization names, to help the system determine who can use the system and what resources each person or organization can use. See also user ID , password . user ID The name the computer uses to identify you. Y our system administra- tor assigns you a user ID. Enter your user ID during the login proce- dure when the system displays the login prompt. See also user ac- count .
GL-23 username The name that the system recognizes as uniquely yours. Also known as your login name. The username is also the name that identifies you to the mail system and other software requiring secure entry . utility See utility program . utility program A program provided with the operating system to perform a frequent- ly required task, such as printing a file or displaying the contents of a directory . See also command, shell command . window A rectangular area of the screen for viewing information. HP VUE allows you to create several types of windows on the screen. Each window is a separate computing environment in which you may execute programs, edit text, or read text. See also W orkspace Man- ager . Window Manager The HP VUE program that controls the size, placement, and operation of windows. working directory See current working dir ectory . W orkspace What the screen becomes when you start HP VUE. Although you can hide the workspace under terminal windows or other graphic objects, you can never position anything behind the workspace. All windows and graphic objects appear stacked on the workspace. See also HP V isual User Environment , terminal window .
GL-24 W orkspace Manager The program that controls the size, placement, and operation of win- dows on the HP VUE W orkspace. The W orkspace Manager is a spe- cial W indow Manager . See also Window Manager . workstation A compact, graphicsâoriented computer having high speed and high memory capacity . A workstation usually includes a keyboard, a moni- tor , and a system unit. See also node, disked workstation , diskless workstation .
Index-1 Index î î/î$ )î î 20 î/î$* ! î./, -î î4îî - î$!$îî.$*)-î î4îî î/î$* î*)) î.*,- # îî #*) - îîî î î4îî ($î,* #*) îîî î4îî î î**. î*)-*' $). ,!îî î î 4î î**.$)" .# -3-. (î !î$'/, î îîî -*'0$)" ,*î' (- î îîîîîî î$-î- îî, *!î î4î '*îî$)"î î4î5î4îî *0 ,0$ 1î î4î5î4î /)'*îî$)"î î4î5î4îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î4î î/-3 '$"#.î î4îî5î4îî î*).,*'- î)î ! î./, -î î4î5î4î $)-.î''$)" $) -3-. ( /)$.î î 4îî5î 4îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 4îî '*îî$)" î)î /)'*îî$)" î î$-îî î4î5î4îî (*/).$)" î)î /)(*/).$)" î î$-îî î4îî5î4îî * ,î.$)" î*).,*'- î)î ! î./, -î î4î *0 ,0$ 1î î4î5î4î .,*/î' -#**.$)"î î4îî 0 ,$!3$)" .# î*)!$"/,î.$*)î î4îî î'*-$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î î*((î)î- î $*î î4îîî î4îî î-.(î î4îî 2$.î î4îî !îîî&/ î î4îî !.$*î î4îî!. î î4îî $*-îî)î î4î ( î$î$)$.î î4î (.î î4îî ,î î î4îî ,'*"$)î î4îî .î,î î4îîî î4î . ') .î î4îî 0 ,$!3î î4îî î*)!$"/,$)" #î,î1î, î î 4î î#î)"$)" (*)$.*, .3 î î 4îî î'*-$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î $)-.î''$)" îîîîîî î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî îîî .î î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî îîî î *, ",î #$î- î*î,îî î 4îî5î 4îî !'* 3 î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî #î,î î$-& î,$0 î î 4îî5î 4îî (î-- -.*,î" î 0$î -î î 4îî 5î 4îî ( (*,3î î 4îî5î 4îî * )$)" .# -3-. ( /)$.î î 4î5î 4î î*)) î.*,-î -3-. ( /)$. îî *1 ,î î4îî î/î$* # îî #*) -îîîî î î4îî î/î$* ($î,* #*) îîîî î4îî
Index-2 keyboard, 1Ä14 mouse, 1Ä14 network, 1Ä15 parallel, 1Ä15 PS/2, 1Ä14 rear panel, 1Ä10Ä1Ä16 RS-232, 1Ä15 SCSI, 1Ä16 serial, 1Ä15 stereo line-IN, 1Ä12 stereo line-OUT , 1Ä12 controls, system unit front panel, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 power switch, 1Ä7 cpio command DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 floppy disk drive, 4Ä10 cstm command, 5Ä15 D DDS tape archiving data, 3Ä14 listing files, 3Ä17 restoring files, 3Ä15 transferring data, 3Ä14 writing to, 3Ä15 DDS tape drive, 3Ä1 cleaning the tape heads, 3Ä7Ä3Ä8 controls and indicators, 3Ä3Ä3Ä6 installing in system unit, B Ä18ÄB Ä21 loading and unloading a data cassette, 3Ä9Ä3Ä19 media interchangeability restrictions, 3Ä8, 3Ä18 media life, 3Ä7Ä3Ä8 overview, 3Ä3Ä3Ä6 troubleshooting, 3Ä18Ä3Ä19 using device files, 3Ä12 verifying the configuration, 3Ä10 DDS-2, data compression mode, switch settings, B Ä21 DDS-2 tape drive jumper settings, B Ä20 LED indicators, 3Ä6Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä6 DDS-DC tape drive jumper settings, B Ä19 LED indicators, 3Ä4Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä4 DDS-format tape, write-protect tab, 3Ä8 DDS-format tape drive, write-protecting a data cassette, 3Ä8 description of system. îîî system description device files overview CD-ROM drive, 2Ä14 DDS tape drive compressed mode, 3Ä14 noncompressed mode, 3Ä12 floppy disk drive, 4Ä6 documentation conventions, xvii E electronic mail. îîî networking, mail electrostatic discharge precautions, AÄ 5 emissions regulations, AÄ3 exit command, SupportW ave, 5Ä17 F fbackup command, DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 File T ransfer Protocol. îîî ftp command
Index-3 !'* 2 î$-& î,$0 î î3î î*)!$"/,$)" .# !'* 2 î,$0 ,î î3îî !*,(î..$)" î î$-& .. î î3î4î3îî $)- ,.$)" î)î , (*0$)" î î$-& .. î î3î .,*/î' -#**.$)"î î3îî /-$)" î 0$î !$' -î î3î 0 ,$!2$)" .# î*)!$"/,î.$*)î î3î4î3îî 1,$. î ,*. î.$)" î î$-& .. î î3î4î3î !'* 2 î$-& .. î,î#$0$)" îî.îî î3î4î3îî !*,(î..$)"î î3î4î3îî '$-.$)" !$' -î î3îî , -.*,$)" !$' - .* -2-. (î î3î4î3îî -î0$)" !$' -î î3î .,î)-! ,,$)" îî.îî î3î4î3îî 1,$. î ,*. î. .îîî î3î4î3î !'* 2 î,$0 $)-.î''$)" $) -2-. ( /)$.î î 3îî4î 3îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 3îî . ,($)î.*,-î î 3îî !.$* î*((î)îî îîîî!*,(î. .î î,$0 î î3îî !. î*((î)îî î3îî H #î,î î,$0 îîî$)"î î 3îî4î 3îî î..îî#$)" (*/).$)" î,îî& .î î 3îî î*)!$"/,$)"î î 3îî $)-.î''$)" $) -2-. ( /)$.î î 3îî4î 3îî %/( , - ..$)"-î î 3îî #î,î1î, î*)!$"/,î.$*)î îîî î*)!$"/,$)" #î,î1î, I $( *,.î). $)!*,(î.$*)î î3îî 4î3îî $)î$îî.*,- îîîî -2-. ( /)$.î î3î îîî îîîîîî î,$0 î î3îî4î3îî îîîîî .î î,$0 î î3î4î3î îîîîîî .î î,$0 î î3î4î3î , (*0îî' î 0$î î î3î -2-. ( /)$.î î3î $)-.î''$)" #î,î1î, îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îîîîî .î î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îîîîîî *, ",î #$î- î*î,îî î 3îî4î 3îî!'* 2 î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îî#î,î î$-& î,$0 î î 3îî4î 3îî(î-- -.*,î" î 0$î -î î 3îî 4î 3îî $).,*î/î.$*)î îîî -2-. ( *0 ,0$ 1 $*-îî) î*((î)îî !'* 2 î$-& î,$0 î î3î îî îîî, -- $)!*,(î.$*)î î3îî J %/( ,-î îîîî îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî îîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî îîîîîî î,$0 î î 3îî !'* 2 î,$0 î î 3îî K & 2î*î,î î*)) î.*,î î3îî L îîîîî îîî î3îî
Index-4 laser safety statements, A Ä6ÄAÄ7 LCD, system unit, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 LED removable device, 1Ä8 system unit, 1Ä6Ä1Ä9 LEDs CD-ROM drive, 2Ä19Ä2Ä20 DDS-2 tape drive, 3Ä6Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä6 DDS-DC tape drive, 3Ä4Ä3Ä8 display codes, 3Ä4 logging in, from a remote terminal. îîî rlogin command M mail, 1Ä22 media interchangeability restrictions, DDS tape drive, 3Ä8 mediainit command, floppy diskette, 4Ä8 memory configuration, B Ä38ÄB Ä45 memory failures, 5Ä11Ä5Ä17 memory SIMM, sequence, B Ä42 monitor changing type, boot console interface, B Ä64 setting the type, at power on, B Ä64 monitors, 1Ä17 mounting a CD-ROM disc, 2Ä15Ä2Ä17 mouse, general information, 1Ä18 mouse connector, 1Ä14 mt command, DDS-format tape drive, 3Ä18 N network connectors, 1Ä15 Network File System (NFS), 1Ä23 networking overview, 1Ä22Ä1Ä23 ftp command, 1Ä23 mail, 1Ä22 Network File System (NFS), 1Ä23 rcp command, 1Ä23 rlogin command, 1Ä22 telnet command, 1Ä22 O on-line help cpio command, 3Ä18, 4Ä10 cstm command, 5Ä15 fbackup command, 3Ä18 floppy information, 4Ä11 ftio command, 3Ä18 ftp command, 1Ä23 mediainit command, 4Ä11 mt command, 3Ä18 rcp command, 1Ä23 rlogin command, 1Ä22 tar command, 3Ä18, 4Ä10 telnet command, 1Ä22 opening the system unit, B Ä6ÄB Ä7 operating system overview, 1Ä19Ä1Ä23 ordering information DDS-format tape cassettes, 3Ä19 floppy diskettes, 4Ä12 P parallel connector, 1Ä15 pointing devices, general information, 1Ä18
Index-5 *)1î, î)((îî.),î î4îî *)1î, -1#.î"î -3-.î' /(#.î î4î5î4î *,)î&î'-î îîî -)&0#(! *,)î&î'- *,)î/î. îî-î,#*.#)(î îîî -3-.î' îî-î,#*.#)( îîî î î)((îî.),-î î4îî Q /î-.#)(-î -/!!î-.#)(-î ), *,)î&î'-î 20### R ,î* î)''î(îî î4îî ,î&îî-î î)î/'î(.-î 20 ,î').î&3 î)*3 #&î-î îîî ,î* î)''î(î ,î')0îî&î î,#0î-î î..îî"#(! ')/(.#(! î,îî%î.î î 4îî ,î')0îî&î 'îî#î îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîî .î*î î,#0îî î 4îî &)**3 î,#0îî î 4îî ,î0#-#)( "#-.),3î 20# ,&)!#( î)''î(îî î4îî îîîîîî î)((îî.),î î4îî *#()/.î î4îî S -î î.3 î(î ,î!/&î.),3 -.î.î'î(.-î 20î î4 î î îî /.#&#.3 îîî#(! î "î,î î,#0îî î 4îî5î 4îî î)( #!/,#(! ."î &)**3 î,#0î,î î4îî ')/(.#(! î îîîîîî î#-îî î4îî5î4îî /(')/(.#(! î îîîîîî î#-îî î4îî5î4îî îîîî î--#!(#(! îî0#îî îî- î-.î 1#îîî î4îî5î4îî -#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4îî5î4îî î/- &î(!." î-.î 1#îî î# î,î(.#î&î î4îîî î4îî-#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4îî îîî&î-î î4î î)( #!/,î.#)( î)(-.,î#(.-î î4î î-.î 1#îî î# î,î(.#î&î î4îî î)((îî.#)(-î î4î î)((îî.),- î(î .î,'#(î.),î î4î îî0#îî îî-î î4îî5î4îî *),. î)((îî.#)(-î î4îî ,î-.,#î.#)(-î î4î5î4îî îîîî î/-î î# î,î(îî-î î4î5î4î îîîî î)((îî.),-î î4îî îîîî îî-î $/'*î,- îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîîî î,#0îî î 4îî &)**3 î,#0îî î 4îî îîîîîî î/- &î(!."î î4îî î)( #!/,î.#)( î)(-.,î#(.-î -#(!&îîî(îîî -.î(îî,îî î4î îî.î,'#(#(! î/- &î(!."î î4îî5î4îî -î,#î& î)((îî.),î î4îî *#()/.î î4îî -)&0#(! *,)î&î'-î î4î î)). î#&/,îî î4îî #(î#îî.îî î3 ."î îîîî î4îî5î4îî 'î'),3 î#&/,î-î î4îî5î4îî *,)î&î'- î(î -)&/.#)(-î î4î5î4î
Index-6 î&&* îî!# (îî î/î îîîîîî î(!,îî î/î îîî *î'î î(!,îî î/î î#&''. î!)" î(!,îî î/î î(î î!)" î(!,îî î/î #&îî!%î î%î î&&*!%î * î îîî î/î %î*-&("î î/î '&-î(!%î 'î î/î ).)*î$ ,î(!î!îî*!&% *î)*)î î/î î0î/î î î ''&(* î &&#) îî%îîî(î î/î î0î/î î ) î%î*-&(" $î)" !%î&($î*!&%î î /îî î ''&(* î &&#) îî%îîî(î î/î î0î/î î )-!*î î)î '&-î(î î /î ).)*î$ îî$!%!)*(î*!&% $î%îîî(îîî!%î î î(î î(!,îî î /îî0î /îîî&%î!î (!%î * î î#&''. î(!,î(î î/î î$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î %$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î ).)*î$ îî)î(!'*!&%î î /î0î /î ).)*î$ &,î(,!î-î î /î ).)*î$ %!*î&%%îî*&()î î /î î0î /î îî&%*(&#)î î /î0î /îîîîî î /î0î /îîîîî î /î0î /î'&-î( )-!*î î î /î0î /î ).)*î$ ,î(!î!îî*!&% *î)*)î î/î î0î/î î T *î( î&$$î%î îîîîî&($î* *î'î î(!,îî î/î î î#&''. î!)"î**îî î/î *î#%î* î&$$î%îî î /îî *(& î#î) &&*!%î See also )&#,!%î '(&î#î$) îîîîîî î(!,îî î/îî îîî *î'î î(!,îî î/î î0î/î î î#&''. î!)" î(!,îî î/î î U %$& %*!%î î îîîîîî î!)îî î/î î0î/î î V ,î(!î. î&$$î%îî î/î î W -î(%!%î î%î îî *!&% )*î*î$î%*)î î /î